JP2011004895A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine for executing a notice performance which uses an operation means and is capable of keeping player's expectations.SOLUTION: As shown in Fig. (D), the message image of "press button to knock down 100 people !!" is displayed at an image display device 5 and a continuous performance is started. Corresponding to a pressing operation (consecutive hitting) to an operation button 32 (E), as shown in Fig. (F), the display of the number of people at the image display device 5 is reduced to "90 people" and then to "80 people", and the possibility that a variable display result becomes a "big winning" and the possibility that a variable display form becomes a super ready-to-win form is notified in advance.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, based on the establishment of a start condition that allows the start of variable display after a game medium passes through a start area provided in the game area. Variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information and deriving and displaying a display result is provided for a player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the identification information. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that controls an advantageous specific gaming state.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a prize game medium such as a predetermined number of prize balls is obtained. Some are paid out to players. In addition, a variable display device is provided that can variably display identification information (also referred to as “variation”) when a game medium wins in a predetermined winning area (start winning opening) (start condition is established). In some cases, when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol), the game can be controlled to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player.

  As such a gaming machine, when a predetermined starting condition is not satisfied even though a game ball has won a winning prize opening, the winning can be stored as a holding memory within a predetermined upper limit range. There is a gaming machine provided with a storage means. In addition, when a player operates the operation means, a game machine is also proposed in which whether or not the display result corresponding to the hold memory becomes a specific display result by changing the display mode of the hold memory display. (For example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-261524 A

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, when the display of the hold memory is changed once in response to the operation of the operation means by the player, the display of the hold memory for the winning is not further changed. Accordingly, when the operation changes to a display mode with a low expectation level as a specific display result, the player can no longer have an expectation as a specific display result.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that performs a notice effect using an operation means and that can maintain a player's expectation.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present invention has a start area provided in the game area (for example, a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and a second start formed by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B). After a game medium (for example, a game ball) passes through a winning opening, etc., each is determined based on the establishment of a start condition that permits the start of variable display (for example, the determination of Yes in step S231). A variable display means (for example, the image display device 5) that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified (for example, decorative symbols) and displays and displays the display result is provided. Game machine that controls to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed as a display result of the identification information. For example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like, and when a game medium passes through the start area, a numerical value for determining a specific gaming state (for example, a special figure display result) for determining whether or not to control to the specific gaming state Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determination) and variable numerical values for determining the variable display pattern of the identification information (for example, numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type). Extraction means for extracting (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes the process of step S209) and variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium passes through the start area For the specific gaming state determination numerical value and the variable display determination numerical value extracted by the extraction means, a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “8”) And the like corresponding to the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied, and the storage means that can be stored as the storage within the range (e.g., the first special figure storage unit 151A or the second special figure storage unit 151B). Predetermining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S240 and S241) that determines whether or not to control to the specific gaming state using the specific gaming state determination numerical value before derivation display of the display result; Based on the determination result of the prior determination means, the variable display determination numerical value corresponding to the variable display for which the start condition is satisfied, and a determination table in which determination values are assigned to a plurality of types of variable display patterns ( For example, it is possible to change the identification information using a jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A or a loss variation pattern type determination table 132C, 132D). Variable display pattern determining means for determining a display pattern (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S261 to S272), and when the game medium passes through the start area before the start condition is satisfied, Based on the variable display determination numerical value extracted by the extracting means and the determined value, the variable display pattern of the identification information is a specific variable display pattern (e.g., a variation accompanied by super reach) among a plurality of types of variable display patterns. A start determination means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of S357), an operation means (for example, an operation button 32 or an operation dial 33) that can be operated by the player, In the variable display prior to the execution of the variable display that is the object of the determination based on the determination by the start determination means. An effect executing means for executing a specific effect that can change the effect mode stepwise based on the continuous operation of the operation means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 starts the winning prize memory display process in step S159 or the continuous effect in step S561). In the determination table, a common determination value is assigned to the specific variable display pattern regardless of the number of reserved memories in the reserved storage means. On the other hand, different decision values are assigned to variable display patterns other than the specific variable display pattern in accordance with the number of reserved memories (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10C, 10D, and 24). Depending on whether it is for normal or shortening, the variation pattern type that includes non-reach and non-reach and variation patterns with normal reach Characterized) that such that the determination value made is assigned.
According to such a configuration, the effect mode of the specific effect is changed step by step according to the number of operations of the operation means, so that the player expects the specific effect even after the effect change is executed once. You can play with a feeling. In addition, while making the determined value of a specific variable display pattern common regardless of the number of reserved memories, the determined value of a variable display pattern other than a specific variable display pattern is made different according to the number of reserved memories. Accordingly, the variable display time can be adjusted, and the situation where the variable display operating rate is reduced can be prevented as much as possible.

The start determination means controls the specific game state based on the specific game state determination value extracted by the extraction means when a game medium passes through the start area before the start condition is satisfied. (For example, the CPU 103 executes the process of step S352), and the effect execution means is in accordance with the determination result of whether or not the specific game state is controlled by the start determination means. The ratio of changing the effect mode stepwise in the specific effect is varied (for example, in the setting of the continuous effect pattern determination table 161 shown in FIG. 15, the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer value is “2” or “4”. In this case, the continuous production patterns RP4-1 to RP4-3 are determined more than the continuous production patterns RP2-1 to RP2-3 than the case of “1” or “3”. That is easily) it may be configured to.
According to such a structure, since the ratio which becomes a specific display result changes with the change of an effect mode, a player comes to pay attention to an effect and the interest of a game improves.

The effect execution means executes the specific effect at each variable display from the start of the execution of the specific effect until the variable display targeted for the determination is executed, and the execution of the specific effect. When the specific effect is executed in the variable display after the start of the display, the specific effect is executed by taking over the content of the specific effect in the previous variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. It may be configured to execute an effect that takes over the display of the number of effects.
According to such a structure, the range of production spreads and the interest of the game is improved.

The effect execution means executes the specific effect in each variable display from the start of the execution of the specific effect until the variable display targeted for the determination is executed, and each variable display The same specific effect may be executed (for example, the same effect as the previous continuous effect is executed as shown in FIG. 44D).
According to such a structure, the range of production spreads and the interest of the game is improved.

The start determination means controls the specific game state based on the specific game state determination value extracted by the extraction means when a game medium passes through the start area before the start condition is satisfied. (For example, the CPU 103 executes the process of step S352), and the operation unit is different from the first operation unit (for example, the operation button 32) and the first operation unit. Means (for example, the operation dial 33), and the effect execution means operates in the specific effect according to a determination result of whether or not the start determination means is controlled to the specific game state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 51, the operation means operated according to the continuous effect pattern may be different).
According to such a configuration, an effect using a plurality of operation means can be executed, so the width of the effect is widened and the interest of the game is improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship of a player's hand in operation of an operation part, a ball | bend rental switch, and a return switch. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows various chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which illustrates a change pattern and a change pattern classification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a continuous production start determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a continuous production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a continuous production pattern. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a production control pattern. FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a specific pattern determination process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a specific pattern determination process at the time of winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern common range. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command process at the time of a start winning prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command process at the time of a start winning prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous production start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous production start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting process during continuous production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a final stop symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production setting process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous production execution process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of a decoration symbol change completion. It is a figure showing an example of production operation in a continuous production. It is a figure showing an example of production operation in a continuous production. It is a figure showing an example of production operation in a continuous production. It is a figure showing an example of production operation in a continuous production. It is a figure showing an example of production operation in a continuous production. It is a figure showing an example of production operation in a continuous production. It is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine of the state where the front frame was released. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the attachment method of a game board. It is a block diagram etc. which show the connection relation of each board | substrate at the time of attaching a game board. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a setting of a continuous production pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of a fluctuation pattern common range.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). A special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed is variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. There is no limitation, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of types of special symbols are assigned with corresponding symbol numbers. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are formed in a square shape, for example. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, a number indicating “0” to “9” and a symbol indicating “−”), and the type may be different. May be different. Further, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, “00” to “99”. .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, in response to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a variable display section divided into a plurality of parts such as three, decorative symbols which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) each identifiable are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In response to the start of either the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol change by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special game, ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas are movable within the display area of the image display device 5 so that the decorative symbols can be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner. May be. As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, the special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the special special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronization with the figure game, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative patterns that can be identified is performed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. Deriving and displaying the display result means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended.

  In the image display device 5, as the display areas to be the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, three areas may be provided so that they can be bonded or separated, or can be bonded and separated. . The display operation in the image display device 5 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. When the first special symbol display device 4A is executing variable display of the first special diagram, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to perform effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special figure is executed on the display device 4B, the effect display is executed on the image display device 5 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). Numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. For example, it may be a decoration image showing a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is attached to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  During the change of the decorative symbol, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol number, sequentially from the top to the bottom. When the scrolling display is performed and the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol. When the decorative design with the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design with the largest design number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, “left” and “right” color symbol display areas 5A and 5B are arranged. When the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 4A is started as the special symbol game, the color symbol variation (for example, update of the display color) starts in the “left” color symbol display area 5A. Is done. On the other hand, when the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started as the special symbol game, the variation of the color symbol is started in the “right” color symbol display area 5B. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the variation of the color symbol is finished, and the fixed color symbol that becomes the variable display result of the color symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, the color symbol display area 5A changes in synchronization with the change of the first special figure, and the color symbol display area 5B changes in synchronization with the change of the second special figure.

  The color symbols variably displayed in the “left” and “right” color symbol display areas 5A and 5B include, for example, four types of symbols (for example, “yellow”, “green”, “red”, “blue”, etc.) As long as it is included. Each of the color symbols is assigned a corresponding symbol number. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “4” are assigned to the color symbols “yellow”, “green”, “red”, and “blue”, respectively. A predetermined color design may be stopped and displayed in accordance with whether the variable display result in the special figure game is “big hit” or “losing”.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the suspension of the variable display occurs when a game ball enters (starts winning) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. To do. That is, a start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  As an example, the start winning storage display area 5H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Yes. When the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the game ball entering the first start winning opening, it is normally not One of the display parts that are displayed (transparent color) (for example, the leftmost display part among the display parts corresponding to the first start winning that is not displayed) is changed to green display. Thereafter, when the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, for example, the display at the leftmost display part among the display parts corresponding to the first start winning prize is removed, and the first The display in each display part corresponding to one start winning is moved to the left one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to green display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part corresponding to the first start winning prize whose display color has changed) returns to non-display. When the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start winning opening, normally non-display ( One of the display parts that are in the (transparent color) (for example, the leftmost display part among the display parts corresponding to the second start winning prize that is not displayed) is changed to blue display. Thereafter, when the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, for example, the display at the leftmost display part of the display part corresponding to the second start winning prize is removed, and the second The display in each display part corresponding to 2 start winnings is moved to the left one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part corresponding to the second start winning prize whose display color has changed) returns to non-display. In this embodiment, eight display portions are provided in the start winning memory display area 5H, of which four on the left are display portions corresponding to the first start winning, and four on the right are the second. It is a display part corresponding to the start winning, and it is possible to specify which start winning is corresponding to the reserved storage.

  In the start winning memory display area 5H, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. A display for displaying the number of reserved special figure memories may be provided together with the start winning memory display area 5H or instead of the start winning memory display area 5H. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, a first hold for displaying the number of special figure hold memories in an identifiable manner above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A so as to be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the second start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has, for example, a number (for example, four) of LEDs corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. It is comprised including.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening. Normally open. On the other hand, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball enters the second start winning opening by tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state. Easy to open and open. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start-up switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If the following, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 3, and changes into an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Forming a mouth. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the off state, the special prize opening door closes the special prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big prize opening door opens the big winning opening. The game ball that has entered the special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Thus, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special game started first is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. Due to this, when the start condition for starting the special figure game is not satisfied, the variable display is suspended. For example, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied when the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold memory The number is incremented by 1 and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. Further, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied when the second start condition is satisfied, the second holding memory is stored. The number is incremented by 1 and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first reserved memory number is decremented by 1 and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. When this is done, the second reserved memory number is decremented by one. The added value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number may be a total reserved memory number or a special figure reserved memory number.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. A plurality of types of normal symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9” or the symbols indicating “−” as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately lighting the decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, one or more general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward a game area is provided at a lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of the shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. An operation unit 30 that can be operated by a player is attached to a member forming the hitting ball supply tray. The operation unit 30 is a push button capable of depressing a direction selected from a plurality of predetermined directions (for example, four directions) such as back, front, left, and right (front and rear, left and right) as viewed from the player. A plurality of operation units, which are a circular operation button 32 in a plan view made up of switches and an annular operation dial 33 in a plan view made up of a dial (jog dial) provided around the operation buttons 32 and capable of being rotated. It is configured to include. The operation button 32 can be pressed down in the whole downward direction in addition to the four directions of front, rear, left and right. That is, the player operates the operation buttons 32 in addition to the pressing direction selection operation for selectively pressing one direction from the front, rear, left and right directions in the state of facing the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the direction selection operation. It is possible to perform an entire pressing determination operation for pressing the entire 32 downward. Further, the player can perform a rotation direction selection operation for selectively rotating the operation dial 33 in one rotation direction of clockwise (clockwise) or counterclockwise (counterclockwise). The player's operation actions performed on the operation buttons 32 and the operation dial 33 are detected by operation detection switches 31 shown in FIG.

  Note that the operation unit 30 is not limited to a unit that can perform a pressing operation or a rotation operation, and may be a unit that can perform a contact operation or a pressing operation such as a touch panel, or a tilting operation such as a lever-type switch. May be possible. Further, a sensor that can detect a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. That is, the operation unit 30 only needs to be configured to detect a predetermined operation action by the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

  In the operation button 32, a portion operated to select the front direction (back side) (the back side portion of the operation button 32 in a state where the player faces the pachinko gaming machine 1) is changed to the front direction portion (back direction portion). ). In the operation button 32, a portion operated to select a rear direction (front side) (a front side portion of the operation button 32 in a state where the player faces the pachinko gaming machine 1) is set to a rear direction portion (front direction portion). ). In the operation button 32, a portion operated to select the left direction (a left portion of the operation button 32 in a state where the player faces the pachinko gaming machine 1) is referred to as a left direction portion. A portion of the operation button 32 that is operated to select the right direction (a right portion of the operation button 32 when the player faces the pachinko gaming machine 1) is referred to as a right direction portion.

  In addition to the operation unit 30, the members that form the hitting ball supply tray in the gaming machine frame 3 include a ball lending switch 91 that is operated when a game ball is lent through a predetermined card unit, a prepaid card, and the like. A return switch 92 or the like that is operated when receiving a return is attached. For example, the ball lending switch 91 and the return switch 92 may be arranged on the same surface as the surface on which the operation unit 30 is attached in the hitting ball supply tray, at a position recessed from the surface. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pressing the ball rental switch 91 or the return switch 92 by mistake while the player is operating the operation unit 30.

  FIG. 2 shows the positional relationship between the player's hand and the ball rental switch 91 and the return switch 92 during operation of the operation unit 30. 2A shows a state in which the operation dial 33 of the operation unit 30 is operated with the left hand, and FIGS. 2B and 2C show a state in which the operation dial 33 is operated with the right hand. Is shown. For example, as shown in FIG. 2 (C), when the operation dial 33 is operated with the right hand, the position of the right hand and the position of the ball rental switch 91 or the return switch 92 are unconsciously overlapped by the player. Sometimes. At this time, if the ball lending switch 91 and the return switch 92 are installed in a state of protruding on the mounting surface of the operation unit 30 in the hitting ball supply tray, the right hand presses the ball lending switch 91 and the return switch 92. There is a possibility that an operation unintended by the player may be performed. Therefore, the ball lending switch 91 and the return switch 92 are arranged in a recessed position on the mounting surface of the operation unit 30 in the hitting ball supply tray, so that the ball lending switch 91 and the return switch 92 are mistakenly operated during the operation of the operation unit 30. This prevents a situation where a hand touches and presses down.

  In the normal game by the normal symbol display 20, the normal symbol display 20 shows that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the general chart start condition for executing variable display is established, based on the fact that the general chart start condition for starting variable display of normal symbols, such as the end of the previous general chart game, is established, Be started. In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the expansion opening control (tilting control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B does not execute the usual game and is tilted. The normal opening control may be performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  The special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the first start winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is satisfied, the process is started on the basis that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special game or the big hit gaming state. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, a game ball that has entered the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied, the second start condition is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special game or the big hit game state.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variable display is started, the special symbol variable display result is obtained when a predetermined time as the special symbol variable time elapses. A definite special symbol (a special graph display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, “big hit” is obtained as a specific display result, and if a special symbol other than the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “lost” is displayed. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round game advantageous to the player (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed a predetermined number of times. . In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the numbers indicating “1”, “3”, and “7” are big hit symbols, the numbers indicating “2” are small hit symbols, and “−” is shown. The symbol is a lost pattern. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big win symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lose symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” are 15 round jackpot symbols, A special symbol indicating the number “1” is a two-round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) as a multi-round specific gaming state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. A round game for changing to the first state advantageous to the player is executed. In this way, the open / close plate that opened the grand prize opening during the execution of the round game receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closed the grand prize opening, thereby providing a special variable prize ball device. 7 is changed to the second state which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round game is completed. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round game, which is the opening cycle of the big prize opening, becomes the first round number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15 round big hit state where the number of executions of the round game is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game. In such a 15 round big hit state, 15 balls are obtained each time a game ball wins a big winning opening. The 15 round round big hit state is also referred to as a first specific gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) as a small round specific gaming state controlled after the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is set in each round game. A period for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (a period in which the big winning opening is opened by the opening and closing plate) is shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state (for example, 0.5 seconds). Become. In the 2 round big hit state, the number of round games executed is the second round number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first round number in the 15 round big hit state. Note that in the 2 round big hit state, it is only necessary to control the number of executions of the round game to be the second round number, and other control may be performed in the same manner as the 15 round big hit state. A game in a two-round big hit state in which the number of executions of the round game is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In a two-round big hit state, in a predetermined winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round game, by changing a predetermined winning port serving as a big winning port from a closed state to an open state, etc. Alternatively, the state may be changed from the second state, which is disadvantageous for the player, to the first state, which is advantageous for the player, and returned to the second state after a predetermined period (the first period or the second period) has elapsed.

  In such a two-round big win state, if a game ball wins a big winning opening, 15 balls will be obtained, but the opening period of the big winning opening is the second period (0.5 seconds) Short. Therefore, the two-round big hit state is a big hit gaming state in which a game is not substantially obtained. The 2 round big hit state is also referred to as a second specific gaming state. Further, the big hit gaming state as the low round specific gaming state is not limited to the number of round games executed as compared to the big round gaming state as the multi round specific gaming state. While the specific gaming state and the multi-round specific gaming state are the same, in the small round specific gaming state, the upper limit period (for example, 2 seconds) for opening the big prize opening is the upper limit period (for example, the multi-round specific gaming state) 29 seconds). That is, the big hit gaming state as the small round specific gaming state is that the period in which the big prize opening is changed to the open state in each round game is a second period shorter than the first period in the multi-round specific gaming state, It is sufficient that the number of game executions is at least one of the second round numbers less than the first round number in the multi-round specific gaming state.

  Further, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” which are the big hit symbols of 15 rounds, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special game 15 After the round big hit state is over, as one of the special game states, time reduction control is performed in which the variable symbol display time (special figure change time) in the special symbol game is shortened compared to the normal state. Controlled. Here, the normal state is a normal game state as a game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, a probability change state, and a short-time state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a system reset is performed). In the same manner as in the case where the initialization process is executed after the power is turned on, the same control is performed. If the time-saving state ends when either of the predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times) the special figure game is executed and the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first, Good. Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, the 15-round jackpot symbol that is controlled to the short-time state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is not probable. It is called a jackpot symbol (also called “normal jackpot symbol”). Further, the fact that the non-probability variable big hit symbol out of the 15 round big hit symbols is stopped and displayed and the variable display result becomes “big hit” is called “15R non-probable big hit” (also referred to as “15R normal big hit”).

  Out of the special symbols that indicate the numbers of “3” and “7” that will be the big hits of 15 rounds, the special symbol that shows the numbers of “7” is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. After the state is over, or after the 2 round jackpot state has ended based on the special symbol showing the number “1” that will be a 2 round jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, As one of the special game states different from the normal state, for example, the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control (probability variation control) is continuously performed together with the time shortening control in which the special figure variation time is shortened compared to the normal state. Controlled. In this probabilistic state, the variable display result of each special figure game and decorative symbols is improved so that the variable display result is “big hit” and the probability of being further controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than in the normal state and the short-time state. To do. Such a probability change state is continued until the next variable display result is a “hit” regardless of the number of executions of the special game. Like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 15 round jackpot symbol that is controlled to the probabilistic state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is It is called a symbol. Like the special symbol indicating the number “1”, the two round big hit symbol controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is a sudden big hit symbol. It is called. Further, the fact that the probability variable big hit symbol of the 15 round big hit symbols is stopped and displayed and the variable display result becomes “big hit” is referred to as “15R probability big hit”. The fact that the sudden hit symbol is stopped and displayed and the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as “surprise big hit” (also referred to as “2R probability variable big hit”). The 15 round jackpot symbols “3” and “7” and the 2 round jackpot symbol “1” are examples, and each jackpot symbol is not limited to these. For example, in order to prevent the player from recognizing the jackpot symbol or the type of jackpot, the jackpot symbol may not be a number but may be a predetermined symbol (for example, “ko”).

  After the special symbol indicating the number “2” as the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit game state is controlled. In this small hit gaming state, a variable winning operation for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is performed as in the two round big hit state. That is, in the small hit game state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) for the second period is repeatedly executed until the second number of times (the number of executions equal to the second round number) is reached. Is done. In the small hit gaming state, as in the two round big hit state, the period during which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state is the second period, and the number of executions of the operation in the first state is the second. Control may be performed so that at least one of the number of times is performed. After the small hit gaming state is ended, the gaming state is not changed, and the game state before the variable display result is “small hit” is continuously controlled. However, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number when the special figure game whose variable display result is “small hit” is executed, after the end of the small hit gaming state, The special gaming state may end and return to the normal state. A game in the small hit gaming state in which the number of times that the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is set to the first state by the variable winning operation is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game, similar to the game in the two round big hit state. When the winning ball apparatus provided separately from the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state in each round game in the two round big hit state, the same as in the two round big hit state even in the small hit game state In this manner, the winning ball apparatus may be changed to the first state.

  In the probabilistic state and the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The second start condition is such that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening, such as a control for making the tilt control time for performing longer than that for the normal state and a control for increasing the number of tilts compared to the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of establishment. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in the probability changing state or the short time state is advantageous to the player, and is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. The time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, it becomes easier to enter the big hit gaming state than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to either the certain change state or the short-time state. .

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and In response to the start of any one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, variable display of the decorative symbols is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms a part of the jackpot combination ("reach variation symbol"). Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium” decoration) that has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) constituting the predetermined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is changing, or all or part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is a big hit. This is a display state that changes in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination.

  Corresponding to the reach state, the decorative pattern fluctuation speed is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative pattern is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, replaying and displaying a moving image different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing different presentation operations from before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the variation pattern of the decorative pattern are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R and the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 are in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included. As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β are preset. And, when the reach form of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β appears, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” compared to the case where the reach form of normal reach appears (big hit reliability) Becomes higher.

  During variable display of decorative designs, unlike reach production, it is possible that the variable display status of decorative designs may be in the reach state, and that the variable display result may be “big hit”. There may be a case where a variable display effect for notifying the player is given by a variable display mode of the symbol or the like. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip” can be executed, and each effect operation is executed in response to a change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side. Or not is determined.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being established once. Before the final determined decorative symbol is derived and displayed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The effect display in which the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo-variable) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). As an example, in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, a special combination pseudo as shown in FIG. 4A is displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A decorative symbol that is one of a plurality of types of lost combinations predetermined as consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, the “left symbol” shown in FIG. 4A or the like is a decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the “middle symbol” is a “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. The “right symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing a fluctuation change display or immediately changing the decorative symbol again only by stopping for a short time. It is only necessary to notify that the decorative pattern is not fixed. Alternatively, even in the temporary stop display, the decorative design may be re-fluctuated after the decorative design is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the stopped decorative display has been confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the variable display result may be set so that the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases as the number of pseudo-continuous changes (re-changes) increases. Thereby, the player can recognize that the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is performed by temporarily stopping display of any one of the pseudo ream chances GC1 to GC8, and the number of times of pseudo ream fluctuation increases. Accordingly, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” is enhanced. In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) once to three times. Based on this, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative design has been started 2 to 4 times in succession.

  When the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, a re-change effect such as a related display effect is executed along with a plurality of change displays including the first change (pseudo-continuous change). Also good. As an example, during the period of each variation display (including the first variation) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, one that is lit among a plurality of decoration LEDs provided inside or outside the game area is 1 It may be controlled to increase one by one. Further, during the period of each variation display (including the first variation), the display color of the decoration LED may be controlled to change, or the lighting LED among the plurality of decoration LEDs changes. May be controlled. As another example, the movable member provided inside or outside the game area may be controlled to operate during the period of each variation display (including the first variation) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. . As another example, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image during the period of each variable display (including the initial change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. May be. In addition to some or all of these re-variation effects, or instead of some or all of these re-variation effects, among the lighting and blinking of decorative LEDs, the operation of the movable member, the display of the effect image, Control may be performed so as to execute a re-variation effect combining a part or all of them. At this time, a case where a re-variation effect combining a plurality of types of effect forms is included, or a case where a re-variation effect is performed multiple times, rather than a case where a re-change effect is executed with only one type of effect form. In the case where the effect mode changes, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” or the “15R probability variable big hit” may be increased.

  The production operation executed as the re-variation production may include any production operation such as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and lighting operation of other light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9. Also, for example, differences in the output of sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L, 8R, differences in the movement of the production target object (such as a movable member) (difference in operating speed, difference in operating distance, difference in operating direction, etc.), image Depending on the movement of the character image displayed on the display device 5 (difference in movement speed, difference in movement distance, difference in movement direction, etc.) Instead, the character display may be changed or the display of the background image may be changed to change the effect mode in the re-change effect. In addition to the re-variation effect executed during the variation of the decorative symbol, for example, when the decorative symbol that is one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped, for example, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, The player may be able to recognize that the chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed by an arbitrary production operation such as the lighting operation of the light emitter such as the effect lamp 9.

  In the variable display effect of “slip”, two or more decorative symbol display areas are displayed after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R (for example, “left” and “right”), a predetermined number (for example, “1” or (2)) decorative symbol display area (for example, “left” decorative symbol display area 5L or “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, or both), the decorative symbols are changed again and then stopped. Thus, the effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed.

  In addition to “pseudo-ream” and “slip”, variable display effects using the variable display operation of such decorative patterns include, for example, “Development chance eyes”, “Development chance eyes end”, “Slip after chance eyes stop” Various production operations such as these may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of “Development Opportunity”, “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern resulting in the variable display result. In all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol variable display state is reached. A predetermined reach production is started. As a result, when the decorative symbol constituting the development opportunity is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. , The player's expectation is enhanced. Further, in the variable display effect of “end of development chance”, after the decorative display variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all displayed. Then, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as a development opportunity is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. , “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped temporarily for the decorative combination (special combination) that is one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. After the display, unlike the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the effect display that changes the decorative symbol to be stopped by changing the decorative symbol again in a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is done.

  Unlike variable reach effects such as reach effects or “pseudo-ream” or “slip” during decorative display of decorative symbols, for example, displaying effect images such as predetermined character images or message images. Notifying the player that there is a possibility that the variable display state of the decorative symbol will reach a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit” due to a presentation operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol A notice effect may be executed. The effect operation as the notice effect is the variable display state of the decorative symbol after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. May be executed (started) prior to the reaching state (before the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). Further, the notice effect that notifies that there is a possibility that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may include one that is executed after the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of notice effects such as “character notice” and “operation notice” are set to be executable. The effect operation that becomes the notice effect may be any action that does not change in the special symbol variable display time (special figure change time) depending on whether or not it is executed.

  In the notice effect of “character notice”, an effect display in which a character image prepared in advance at a predetermined position is displayed on, for example, the display screen of the image display device 5 during the variable display of the decorative design. Here, as the display of the character image, a character image that is separate from the decorative design may be displayed statically or in motion (animation display), or a character image that is variably displayed integrally with the decorative design. The display may be an operation display (animation display) in a display form different from the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  In the notice effect of “notice at the time of operation”, for example, when the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, a pressing operation or a rotation operation) on the operation unit 30 while the decorative symbol is variably displayed, for example, the image display device 5 The effect operation is changed by changing the display of the effect image on the display screen or by changing the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As an example, in the notice effect of “notice at the time of operation”, a predetermined effect operation serving as a button operation promotion effect is performed during variable display of a decorative symbol. In the button operation promotion effect, for example, an effect image such as a character image or a message image prepared in advance is displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen of the image display device 5, thereby prompting the player to operate the operation unit 30. Any production operation may be used. The effect operation that prompts the player to perform an operation action on the operation unit 30 is not limited to an effect that causes the image display device 5 to display an effect image, and that that outputs a predetermined sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the game effect lamp 9 Or a lighting LED that lights or blinks in a predetermined lighting pattern, a movable member provided in an effect accessory provided inside or outside the game area in a predetermined operation mode, or any of these May be combined. When such a button operation promotion effect is performed, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the operation of the operation unit 30 by the player is set. And if operation of the operation part 30 by the player is detected by the operation detection switch 31 within the operation effective period, the execution of the button operation promotion effect is stopped at the timing when the operation is detected, and prepared in advance, for example. Any one of the plurality of types of effect images is displayed on the image display device 5, or a sound effect corresponding to any one of the plurality of types of sound patterns prepared in advance is displayed on the speaker 8L. Various rendering operations such as output from 8R are executed.

  As the notice effect by the effect operation different from the variable display operation of such a decorative pattern, various effect operations such as “step-up operation” can be executed in addition to “character notice” and “operation notice”. Good. Here, in the notice effect of “step-up operation”, as an example, a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance are switched and displayed in a predetermined order on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the variable display of decorative symbols. An effect operation may be performed such that the effect mode changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages by the effect display. In the notice effect of “step-up operation”, any one of a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, and then the effect image The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without being switched. Further, as another example of the notice effect of the “step-up operation”, there are a plurality of types of movable members provided in the effect accessory provided inside or outside the game area during the variable display of the decorative design according to a predetermined order. An effect operation in which the effect mode changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages may be performed by the effect operation operated in the operation mode. In the notice effect of “step-up operation”, after the movable member performs the effect operation in one kind of operation mode, the effect operation in the notice effect may be ended without switching to the effect operation of the second stage. There may be. As described above, the notice effect of the “step-up operation” is executed in response to one start prize (that one game ball has entered the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening). This is a kind of notice effect that is executed during the variable display of symbols and decorative symbols, and is in particular a step-up notice effect in which the manner of notice (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) changes (steps up) in multiple stages. . In general, the greater the number of changes (number of steps), the higher the reliability (the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”). Also, depending on the number of steps in the step-up notice effect or the effect mode at each step, it becomes “15R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, a specific reach effect is executed, “15R uncertain variation” Of the promotion from “big hit” to “15R probable big hit”, at least one of them may be notified in advance. Further, the object to be notified may be changed according to the number of times of change (number of steps). For example, it may be “reach confirmation” when going to the second step, “super reach confirmation” when going to the third step, and “big hit confirmation” going to the fourth step. As the change (step-up) of the notice mode, different character images may be displayed in order, or the step-up may be performed by changing the shape or color of one character. May be. In other words, any means can be used as long as it can be recognized that the state of the notice (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as viewed from the player changes stepwise.

  In addition, during the variable display of decorative symbols, a predetermined effect operation that is a continuous effect may be executed. In the continuous production, there is a possibility that the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes a reach state over the variable display of the decorative symbol multiple times, and the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the variable display result is “big hit” may be executed. An effect operation for notifying the player of this is performed. Here, in the production operation that is a continuous production, as an example, the shape of one of the circular display parts (for example, the display part at the right end of the circular display part) in the start winning memory display area 5H is transformed into a star shape. Display. After that, based on the establishment of the start condition for starting the variable display game, the display part deformed and displayed in a star shape is returned to non-display, and the circular display part that is different from the display part that has been returned to non-display The shape of one of the display parts (for example, the display part on the left side of the display part returned to non-display) is deformed and displayed in a star shape.

  Further, in this embodiment, in addition to the continuous effect based on the shape of the display part, a button for displaying an operation prompting the operation button 32 on the image display device 5 or lighting a lamp built in the operation button 32 is provided. An operation promotion effect is performed, and when the operation button 32 is operated, a continuous effect for displaying a preview image or characters on the image display device 5 may be executed. Such a continuous effect is also called a specific effect. In this embodiment, in addition to the continuous effect based on the shape of the display part shape, when the specific effect is executed, there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” than when the specific effect is not executed ( (Big hit reliability) is set to be high. According to such a configuration, the player pays attention to the continuous performance, and can improve the interest of the game.

  In this embodiment, in a specific effect using the operation button 32, a button operation promotion effect is performed in each variable display from the start of execution of the continuous effect until the end of the execution of the continuous effect. In accordance with the number of times the operation button 32 is pressed (continuous operation with respect to the operation button 32), a continuous effect that changes the preview image and characters displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a continuous effect that changes the notice image and the characters according to the continuous operation on the operation button 32 is executed, but the notice image is displayed according to the continuous operation on the operation dial 33. Alternatively, a continuous effect that changes characters may be executed. The continuous effect corresponding to the operation of the operation button 32 is to display the notice image or the character on the image display device 5, but it may be a continuous effect that outputs sound from the speaker 8, or the game effect lamp 9 is It may be a continuous production that emits light.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There are cases in which a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as “non-reach” (also referred to as “unreach loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as reach-losing combination) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”. It should be noted that the fixed decorative pattern that is a non-reach combination and the fixed decorative pattern that is a reach combination are collectively referred to as a fixed decorative pattern of a lost combination (non-specific combination).

  When a special symbol indicating the number “3”, which is a non-probable variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed. Corresponding to reaching the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a definite decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined non-probable variation big hit combination (also referred to as “normal big hit combination”) is stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed decorative symbols that are non-probable big hit combinations are, for example, symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Among the decorative symbols “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” are “left”, “middle”, What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the non-probable variation big hit combination are referred to as non-probable variation symbols (also referred to as “normal symbols”). . Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a non-probable variable big hit symbol, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed after a predetermined reach effect is executed. The variable display mode is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as jackpot type) of “non-probable change” (also referred to as “normal jackpot”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “non-probability change”, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit gaming state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the short time state or the normal state. It will be.

  When the special symbol showing the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the situation, after reaching the same reach effect as when the big hit type is "non-probable change", or reach effect different from when the big hit type is "non-probable change" For example, after the process is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed. Here, for example, the fixed decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination has a symbol number variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Among the decorative patterns of “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative patterns having the odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “ What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect is executed, the decorative display variable display mode in which the definite decorative symbol of the probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed is This is referred to as a variable display mode of “probability change” (also referred to as a big hit type) when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  When the probability variable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-probable variable big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the decorative symbol. In this way, even if the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed, if the probable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, it is included in the variable display mode of “probable change”. . Thus, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “probability change”, the control is made to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, the probability change state is controlled. The determined decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination and the fixed decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination are collectively referred to as a final decorative symbol of a big hit combination (specific combination).

  A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the confirmed decorative symbol is a non-probable variable big hit combination or a probable variable big hit combination. In the re-lottery effect, after the decorative symbols that are the non-probable big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5, for example, “ In the left, middle, and right decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same decorative pattern is made to change again, and the decorative symbol (probable variable symbol) that becomes a probabilistic big hit combination is changed. One of the decorative symbols (non-probable variable symbols) that is a probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the confirmed decoration that becomes the non-probable big hit combination after re-changing the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols A changing promotion failure effect that derives and displays a symbol is performed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the fixed decoration that becomes a probable big hit combination after re-variation of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern The changing promotion success effect in which the symbols are stopped and displayed may be executed, or the changing promotion failure effect in change may be executed.

  After the definitive decorative symbol that is a non-probable jackpot combination is derived and displayed, at the start of the jackpot gaming state or during execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state, the next round will start after any round ends in the jackpot gaming state During the big hit that becomes a notification effect as to whether or not to control to the probable change state in the period until the start, the period from the end of the last round in the big hit gaming state to the start of the next variable display game, etc. A promotion effect may be executed. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion promotion executed after the final round in the jackpot gaming state is sometimes referred to as “end promotion promotion” in particular.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is no jackpot promotion success effect that informs that there is a promotion that the game state becomes a probabilistic state even though the confirmed decorative symbol is a non-probable big hit combination, and there is no promotion that becomes a promiscuous state There is a promotion promotion failure during jackpot. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 and either the non-probable variable symbol or the probable variable symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result, or the decorative symbol variable display What is necessary is just to alert | report so that a player can recognize the presence or absence of the promotion which will be in a probability change state by displaying the effect image different from.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a special symbol indicating the number “1” that is a two-round big hit symbol is stopped or displayed, or a special symbol indicating the number “2” that is a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In such a case, the variable display state of the decorative pattern does not reach the reach state, but a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative patterns predetermined as, for example, the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 as shown in FIG. One of the above may be stopped. In addition, when a special symbol indicating the number of “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state. Then, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a special symbol indicating the number of “1” which is a two-round jackpot symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed ornament symbols are stopped and displayed is variable. This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a big hit type) of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise hit big hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”) when the display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “surprise accuracy”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state is finished, the probability change state is controlled.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “accuracy”, the accuracy mode start effect may be executed during variable display of the decorative symbols. In the surprise mode start effect, a predetermined effect operation corresponding to the fact that the jackpot type is “Accuracy” is performed. After the surprise mode start effect is performed, an effect mode different from the normal effect mode called the accuracy mode may be started. In addition, the random mode start effect is not limited to the effect operation that is executed during the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol, and continues from the variable display even during part or all of the period of the two round big hit state. An effect operation may be performed. When the suddenness mode start effect is started, the decorative pattern that is variably displayed may be deleted, and after the suddenness mode start effect is executed, the confirmed decorative symbol may not be derived and displayed. In the sudden accuracy mode, for example, until the variable display result is “big hit” and the probability variation state ends, the effect in the sudden accuracy mode is performed. In the effect in the sudden accuracy mode, the display mode of the background image on the display screen of the image display device 5 is different from the display mode in the normal rendering mode, and is output from the speakers 8L and 8R along with the variable display of the decorative pattern. The sound to be different from the sound in the normal effect mode, the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED to be different from the lighting pattern in the normal effect mode, or a part of these Alternatively, by combining all of them, it may be informed so that the player can recognize that the mode is inaccuracy.

  In the probability variation state, for example, an effect image for informing that the probability variation state is “being probability variation” is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and / or a background image or a decorative pattern on the display screen of the image display device 5. The display mode may be different from the display mode in the normal effect mode, so that the effect mode during probability change in which the player can recognize the probability change state may be set.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a power supply board 16, and a payout control board 17 as shown in FIG. ing. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the power supply board 16 and the payout control board 17, and the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. A drawer relay board 19 is also mounted for relaying various control signals transmitted between the speaker 8, the game effect lamp 9, and the operation detection switch 31. Further, a frame relay board 26 is provided between the drawer relay board 19 and the speaker 8, the game effect lamp 9, and the operation detection switch 31 for relaying various control signals. In addition, various boards such as an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer are provided. Further, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9 or the like. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  The power supply board 16 supplies electric power to various boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 and effects devices such as the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, and the speaker 8.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. When the main board 11 receives detection signals from various switches, the main board 11 sends out a prize ball signal for executing a prize ball payout according to the various switches to the payout control board 17. The winning ball signal is transmitted via the power supply board 16. When the payout control board 17 receives the prize ball signal, it drives the ball payout device 18 to pay out the prize ball according to the prize ball signal. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. A wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to the relay board 15, for example, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

  The relay board 15 only needs to be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulating circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent signals from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and pass signals only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing this, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 5A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 5A, the command 8001H is a first change start command for designating the start of change in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special graphic game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  In this embodiment, the first and second variation start commands and the variation pattern designation command are prepared as separate production control commands. On the other hand, the designation content indicating which of the first special figure and the second special figure is to start variation and the designated content of the fluctuation pattern are configured to be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a special symbol (first special figure or second special figure) that starts change and a change pattern is prepared. You may enable it to specify the special symbol and fluctuation pattern which become a fluctuation start. Here, in a case where the special symbol and the variation pattern for starting the variation can be specified by one effect control command, the special symbol (the first special feature for starting the variation) for one variation pattern. There are cases where it is necessary to prepare two types of effect control commands according to the figure or the second special figure). On the other hand, if an effect control command for designating a special symbol for starting variation and an effect control command for designating a variation pattern are prepared separately, two types of effect control commands corresponding to the special symbol for starting variation The number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of variation patterns may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 5 (B), the prior determination result of whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, and the variable display result is Different EXT data is set according to the big hit type determination result of whether the variable display mode (big hit type) of the decorative symbol in the case of “big hit” is “non-probable change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” Is done. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result notification command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result indicated in the variable display result notification command may be configured to be specified by one effect control command. As an example, an effect in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a variation pattern and a variable display result (any one of “losing”, “big hit”, “small hit”, and a big hit type in the case of “big hit”). A control command may be prepared, and information that can specify the variation pattern and the variable display result may be transmitted by the effect control command. Alternatively, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands. Here, when the variation pattern and the variable display result are configured to be specified by a single effect control command, a plurality of types of effects corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display results for one variation pattern. You may need to provide control commands. On the other hand, if the production control command for designating the variation pattern and the production control command for notifying the variable display result are prepared separately, the number of production control commands corresponding to the number of types of the variation pattern and the variable display result are provided. The number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8F00H is a decorative symbol stop command for designating stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to whether the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time-short state. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the normal state, and the command 9501H is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the probability change state, The command 9502H may be a third gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the short time state.

  In this embodiment, a decoration symbol stop command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as an effect control command for designating stop of variable display of the decoration symbol. On the other hand, the decorative symbol stop command may not be transmitted. In this case, on the side of the production control board 12, the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command is specified, and the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received. When the elapsed time reaches the specified special figure variation time, a setting for ending the effect executed corresponding to the special game is performed without receiving an effect control command from the main board 11. You can make it.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the corresponding relationship in the variable display result notification command.

  The command A1XXH is a big winning opening releasing notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is a period in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening or the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the 15 round big hit state, or the big winning in the 2 round big hit state or the variable winning operation Different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of times the mouth is opened (for example, “1” or “2”). In the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, regardless of whether the big winning opening is in the open state or the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, Alternatively, the continuous presentation operation may be executed from the start time of the small hit game state or from the start of variable display of the decorative symbols to the end time of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Or, in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, depending on whether the big winning opening is in the open state or the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, different performance operations May be executed.

  The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the winning end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command or the winning start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command or the hit start designation command. . In addition, when controlled to the two round big hit state and / or small hit game state, some or all of the hit start designation command, the big prize opening opening designation command, the big prize opening opening designation command, and the winning end designation command are all or part of Instead of being transmitted, the effect operation in the two round big hit state and / or the small hit game state may be executed by the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command.

  The command B1XXH is executed by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the game ball that has entered (started winning) the first starting winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A. This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that a first start condition for executing a special figure game using one special figure has been established. In this embodiment, the first start opening winning designation command notifies the determination result using the predetermined determination numerical value at the time of the first start winning that is the time of detecting the game ball that has passed through the first start winning opening. Also used as a control command. For example, as shown in FIG. 5C, in the first start opening winning designation command, the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Whether or not it matches the determined value of “winning” and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is the variation pattern of the decorative pattern regardless of the reserved memory number of the special figure game (the special figure reserved memory number) Is a non-reach variation pattern common range (for example, a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”). Depending on whether or not the super reach variation pattern (for example, the variable display result is “losing” and the variation pattern with super reach) is within the common range of the super reach variation pattern. EXT data is set that. More specifically, the command B100H is a first winning determination result notification command for notifying that it is within the non-reach fluctuation pattern common range. Command B101H is a second winning determination result notification command for notifying that the value is within the common range of the super reach variation pattern. The command B102H is a third winning determination result notification command for notifying that the variable display result is “win”. The command B103H is a fourth winning determination result notification command for notifying that the variable display result is not “winning” and is not within the non-reach variation pattern common range or the super reach variation pattern common range.

  The command B2XXH is generated by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the game ball that has entered (started winning) the second starting winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting port switch 22B. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure is established. In this embodiment, the second start opening winning designation command notifies the determination result using the predetermined determination numerical value at the time of the second start winning that is at the time of detecting the game ball that has passed the second start winning opening. Also used as a control command. For example, as shown in FIG. 5C, in the second start opening winning designation command, the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Whether or not it matches the determined value that is “winning” and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type) is the decorative symbol regardless of the reserved memory number of the special figure game (the special figure reserved memory number). Whether the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern common range that is a non-reach fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative display variable display mode is “non-reach”) No, depending on whether or not it is within the common range of the super reach variation pattern to be used as the super reach variation pattern (for example, the variable display result is “losing” and the variation pattern is accompanied by super reach) Different EXT data is set. More specifically, the command B200H is a fifth winning determination result notification command for notifying that it is within the non-reach fluctuation pattern common range. Command B201H is a sixth winning determination result notification command for notifying that the value is within the common range of the super reach variation pattern. The command B202H is a seventh winning determination result notification command for notifying that the variable display result is “win”. The command B203H is an eighth winning determination result notification command for notifying that the variable display result is not “winning” and is not within the non-reach variation pattern common range or the super reach variation pattern common range.

  The command C0XXH displays the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number so as to be specified in the start winning memory display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5. This is a pending storage count notification command for notifying the total pending storage count that is the total value of. For example, in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition being established, either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted as the reserved storage number notification command. Following this, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the reserved memory count notification command, for example, the total stored number (for example, “1” to “8”) of the reserved data in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the hold data in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B shown in FIG. Correspondingly, different EXT data is set. Thereby, on the side of the production control board 12, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, and the first special figure The total number of stored hold data in the hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B can be specified.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 It comprises a random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data in the RAM 102, temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores various fluctuation data in the RAM 102. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed. The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 may include at least the RAM 103 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101 may be external or internal. The I / O 105 may be externally attached.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the game control program stored in the ROM 101 to perform the game control. Specifically, this means that the CPU 103 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another board different from the main board 11.

  On the main board 11, for example, the random number circuit 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern type, Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern and the random value MR5 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used.

  Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers. The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses the random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated independently of the CPU 103 by the random number circuit 104, and the numerical data indicating the other random number values MR2 to MR5 is updated by the CPU 103 using the random counter. It may be updated by software using Also, by executing predetermined processing such as scramble processing and arithmetic processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104, numerical data indicating all or part of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is obtained. It may be updated. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  The game control microcomputer 100 may have a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 100 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 101 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 100). The numerical data obtained by the setting is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 104 can be further improved.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game as “big hit”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”. The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines the jackpot type, which is a variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit”, as one of “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random value MR3 is in the range of “1” to “251”. Takes the value of The random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, a value in the range of “1” to “997”. Take. The random value MR5 for determining the general-purpose display result is used for determining whether the variable display result in the general-purpose game by the normal symbol display 20 is “per-normal” or “missing the general-purpose figure”. For example, a value in the range of “3” to “13”. That is, the random number value MR5 for determining the normal game display result is a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the normal start-up winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result in the normal game (normally open state). ) Is used to determine whether or not to change to a state in which a game ball is likely to enter (expanded open state).

  FIG. 7A shows a variation pattern of the decorative design in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. When the display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change” or “surprise change”, or when the variable display result is “small hit”, etc. Correspondingly, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”) and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is referred to as a hit variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, in this embodiment, fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4 are prepared in advance as non-reach fluctuation patterns. Further, as the reach variation pattern, variation pattern PA2-1, variation pattern PA2-2, variation pattern PB2-1, variation pattern PB2-2, variation pattern PA3-1, variation pattern PA3-2, variation pattern PB3-1, variation A pattern PB3-2 is prepared in advance. The hit fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change” include the change pattern PA4-1, the change pattern PA4-2, the change pattern PB4-1, A pattern PB4-2, a fluctuation pattern PA5-1, a fluctuation pattern PA5-2, a fluctuation pattern PB5-1, and a fluctuation pattern PB5-2 are prepared in advance. As variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the variable display result is “small hit”, the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 are the variation patterns. Are prepared in advance. Further, a fluctuation pattern PC1-4 and a fluctuation pattern PC1-5 are prepared in advance as hit fluctuation patterns corresponding only to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”.

  FIG. 7B shows the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol in this embodiment. Each variation pattern shown in FIG. 7A is included in at least one variation pattern type among the plurality of variation pattern types shown in FIG. That is, each variation pattern type may be configured to include one or a plurality of variation patterns classified (grouped) based on, for example, an effect operation performed during variable display of decorative symbols. As an example, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which a variable display state of a decorative design does not become a reach state by classifying (grouping) a plurality of variation patterns by the type of reach effect (effect mode), and a variation with normal reach What is necessary is just to divide into the fluctuation pattern classification in which the pattern is included, and the fluctuation pattern classification in which the fluctuation pattern with a super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is included. As another example, categorizing (grouping) multiple variation patterns according to the presence or absence of “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects and the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) to execute “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects A variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that is not included, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is 1 in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, What is necessary is just to divide into the variation pattern classification in which the variation pattern which makes the frequency | count of execution of a pseudo | simulation continuous variation (revariation) 2 or more is included in the variable display effect of this. As yet another example, a plurality of variation patterns may be classified (grouped) according to the presence or absence of variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip”, or the variable display time of decorative symbols. Among the plurality of variation pattern types, there may be one configured to include a common variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 7B, the variation pattern type CA1-1 to the variation pattern type CA1-3 are previously stored in correspondence with the case where the variable display result is “losing” and “non-reach” variable display mode. It is prepared. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “reach”, the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4 are prepared in advance. Corresponding to the variable display result (big hit type) of “big hit” when the variable display result is “big hit”, the variable pattern type CA 3-1 to the variable pattern type CA 3-3 are prepared in advance. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the variable display mode (big hit type) of “surprise” or the variable display result is “small hit”, the variation pattern type CA4-1 is prepared in advance. ing. Furthermore, the variation pattern type CA4-2 is prepared in advance only in the case where the variable display result is the “big hit” and the “surprise” variable display mode (big hit type).

  The variation pattern type CA1-1 is a variation pattern type of “no shortening” in which the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is not shortened and variable display effects such as “pseudo-ream” and “slip” are not executed. , A variation pattern previously associated with “no shortening” is included. The variation pattern type CA1-2 is, for example, a variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol in response to the total reserved memory number being “3” or more, or the time shortening control being performed in the probability variation state or the short time state. It is a variation pattern type of “with shortening” in which variable display effects such as “pseudo-ream” and “slip” are not executed because the time is shortened, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “with shortening”. The variation pattern type CA1-3 is a variation pattern type of “sliding, pseudo-continuous” in which a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” or “sliding” is executed when the variable display mode is “non-reach”. It includes a variation pattern previously associated with “slip, pseudo-ream”.

  In the variation pattern type CA2-1, when the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is not executed, the reach effect is terminated with the normal reach that becomes the normal reach effect after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state. Is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (lack) pseudo-ream” that derives and displays a definite decorative symbol of a reach combination, and includes a variation pattern that is pre-associated with “normal reach (lack) pseudo-ream”. In the variation pattern type CA2-2, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is two times, and the reach of the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state. This is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous variation 2 times” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol of reach combination when the production is finished, and is previously associated with “normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous variation 2 times”. Variation patterns are included.

  In the variation pattern type CA2-3, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is 1, and the reach of the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state, followed by normal reach. This is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous variation once” that derives and displays a definite decorative symbol of reach combination when the production is finished, and is previously associated with “normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous variation once”. Variation patterns are included. Fluctuation pattern types CA2-4 are accompanied by super reach (super reach α or super reach β) after the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state, and when the reach production is finished, the reach decorative combination is derived and displayed. The variation pattern type of “Super Reach (Lose)” is included, and includes a variation pattern associated with “Super Reach (Lose)” in advance.

  In the variation pattern type CA3-1, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is not executed, but the normal display is performed after the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and when the reach effect ends, the definite decoration of the big hit combination It is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (big hit) quasi-continuous” for deriving and displaying a symbol, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “no normal reach (big hit) quasi-continuous”. In the variation pattern type CA3-2, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, and the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, followed by the normal reach. Is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (big hit) pseudo-relation” and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “normal reach (big hit) pseudo-ream”. Fluctuation pattern type CA3-3 is a “super reach (big hit)” that displays a definite decorative symbol of a big hit combination when super reach is reached after the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state and the reach effect is finished. It is a variation pattern type, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “super reach (big hit)”.

  The variation pattern type CA4-1 is a variation pattern type of “2nd release chance stop” that derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is one of the 2nd release chances TC1 to TC4, and “2nd release chance stop”. Are included in advance. In the example of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 7A, the variation pattern PC1-1 to variation pattern PC1-3 is a variation pattern in which the definite decorative symbol is one of the two chances of opening TC1 to TC4. It is included in the pattern type CA4-1. The variation pattern type CA4-2 is a method of deriving and displaying a definite decorative pattern of reach combination after setting the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. It is a variation pattern type of “open reach reach loss”, and includes a variation pattern that is associated in advance with “2 times open reach loss”. In the example of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 7A, the variation pattern PC1-4 and the variation pattern PC1-5 are variation patterns in which the determined decorative design is a reach combination, and are included in the variation pattern type CA4-2. It will be.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. The ROM 101 also has table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, and decorative patterns as shown in FIG. Table data constituting a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

  FIG. 8 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 130 stored in the ROM 101. The special symbol display result determination table 130 is determined as a special symbol variable display result (special symbol display result) in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not the variable display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state with “big hit”, and whether or not the variable display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state with “small hit” FIG. 10 is a table referred to for determination based on a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result.

  In the special figure display result determination table 130, a numerical value (compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the short-time state, or the probabilistic state) (Determined value) is assigned to one of the special chart display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. In this embodiment, whether the game is a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Regardless, the special figure display result is determined with reference to the same special figure display result determination table 130.

  On the other hand, determination values are assigned to the special graphic display results corresponding to the special graphic game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special graphic game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Different decision tables may be prepared. In this case, in the case of the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the case of the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B, assignment of the decision value to the special symbol display result of “small hit” May be different. As an example, in the case of a special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, the ratio determined as the special symbol display result of “small hit” as compared to the case of the special game by the first special symbol display device 4A As a result, a decision value may be assigned to each special figure display result.

  With such a setting, in the special figure game using the second special figure, the probability that the variable display result will be “small hit” is reduced compared to the special figure game using the first special figure. When the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening due to the high opening control in the short time state, the special figure display result is “small hit” and the little hit game state in which almost no prize ball is obtained. It is possible to prevent the game from being controlled, and to suppress the decline of the game entertainment due to the occurrence of a delay in the game in the probability variation state or the short time state. In particular, when the special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 4B is executed in preference to the special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B in the probability change state or the short time state. Since the frequency of the special game in the game will be increased, the time from the probability change state or short-time state (particularly the probability change state) to the 15th round big hit state will be shortened by such setting, and the game entertainment will be reduced. The effect that can be suppressed is great. Further, in the case of a special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B, a determined value may be assigned so that the special figure display result of “small hit” is not determined.

  FIG. 9 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 is variably displayed based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and control is made to the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, whether the value of the variation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 12 is “1” or “2”. Accordingly, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit type such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. Here, the variable special symbol designation buffer value becomes “1” when the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, and the second special symbol display device 4B sets the second special symbol display device 4B. It becomes “2” when the special figure game using the special figure is executed.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131, the table data indicating the determination values assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types is the result of determining whether to control to the 15 round jackpot state or the 2 round jackpot state, and the end of the jackpot gaming state Later, it is data for determination corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to control to the probability variation state. For example, the table data indicating the decision values assigned to the “non-probable change” or “probability change” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result of controlling to the 15-round jackpot state, while being assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. The table data indicating the determined value corresponds to the determination result of controlling to the big round hit state. The table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “non-probability” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result that the control is not controlled to the probability change state, while being assigned to the jackpot type “probability change” or “surprise”. The table data indicating the determined value indicates the determination result that the control is performed in the probability variation state. The jackpot type determination table 131 is a value corresponding to the determined jackpot type (for example, any one of “0” to “2”) as a value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer 155 (a jackpot type buffer value). Table data (setting data) may be included.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 9, the allocation of the determined value for each jackpot type differs depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. For example, for the jackpot type of “probability change”, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a determined value in the range of “37” to “72” is assigned, while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value When “2” is “2”, a determined value in the range of “37” to “100” is assigned. When the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a decision value in the range of “73” to “100” is assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type, while the variation special figure designation buffer value is “ In the case of “2”, no decision value is assigned.

  In the setting example shown in FIG. 9, the special figure display result is “big hit” based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. When it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state, it is not determined to control to the two round big hit state with the big hit type as “surprise”. With such a setting, when the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening in the high opening control in the probability variation state or the short time state, the big hit type is “surprise” and almost no prize ball is obtained. It is possible to prevent the game from being controlled to a two-round big hit state, and to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to a delay in the game in the probability variation state or the short time state. In particular, when the special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 4B is executed in preference to the special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B in the probability change state or the short time state. Since the frequency at which the special game is executed is increased, such a setting has a great effect of suppressing the decline of the game entertainment. In addition to this setting, the special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 4B is executed in preference to the special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 4A, so that 15 rounds from the probability variation state and the short time state can be obtained. The ratio of hitting big hits can be increased to improve the gaming fun.

  Even when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, for example, a smaller decision value than that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1” is assigned to the special figure display result of “surprise”. You may be made to do. Further, when the gaming state is a short-time state, if the big hit type is “surprise” and the game shifts to the probable change state after the end of the two round big hit state, the degree of advantage for the player increases. Thus, when the gaming state is the short-time state, even if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the big hit type determination table 131 is assigned so that the determination value is assigned to the special figure display result of “surprise”. The table data may be configured.

  FIG. 10 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, as the variation pattern type determination table, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 10 (A), the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 10 (B), and FIG. The loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C shown in FIG. 10 and the loss change pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D shown in FIG.

  The jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern type is changed according to the determination result of the jackpot type. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the numerical value MR3. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type according to whether the determination result of the jackpot type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”. (Determined value) is assigned to any one of the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3, variation pattern type CA4-1, and variation pattern type CA4-2. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, the determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type varies depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. There is a part. For example, depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the assignment of the decision value to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3 differs. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same variation pattern type can be varied according to the determination result as to which of the multiple types of jackpot types.

  Further, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, there is a portion in which the determined values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. For example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to the variation pattern type CA3-3, while the variation pattern type CA4- No determination value is assigned to 1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprise”, the decision values are assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2, while the variation pattern type CA3-1 to CA4-2. No determined value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-3. As a result, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is controlled to the 2 round big hit state according to the “surprise”, the variation pattern type different from the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state is determined. can do.

  When the big hit type is determined as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state Thus, the assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern type may be made different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same fluctuation | variation pattern classification can be varied according to which of a plurality of types of gaming states. Also, when the big hit type is determined as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state Thus, the determined values may be assigned to different variation pattern types. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states.

  The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B is a table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “small hit”. In the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, all numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1. Here, a part of the determined value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 according to the case where the big hit type is “surprise” in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. . As described above, the variation pattern type CA4-1 is a common variation pattern type in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and the special figure display result is “small hit”. That is, the table data corresponding to the big hit type “surprise” in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A and the table data constituting the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B include a common variation pattern type. Is set to

  When the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D are determined (predetermined) when the special figure display result is determined to be “lost”, the variation pattern type is determined. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. Here, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C is used when the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is not shortened, for example, when the gaming state is normal and the total number of reserved memories is less than “3”. Selected as the table used. On the other hand, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D is special, for example, when the gaming state is a probability change state or a short time state, or when the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more even in the normal state. It is selected as a use table when the variable display time of symbols and decorative symbols is shortened.

  Note that the variation pattern type is determined by referring to different determination tables when the gaming state is a probability change state or a short-time state and when the gaming state is a normal state and the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more. You may be made to be. Further, the variation pattern type may be determined by referring to a different determination table depending on whether or not the total reserved storage number is a predetermined number other than “3” or not. Furthermore, when the total number of reserved memories is “0”, when the total number of reserved memories is “1”, when the total number of reserved memories is “2”, the total number of reserved memories is “3”. The change pattern type may be determined with reference to different determination tables when there is a certain number and when the total number of reserved memories is “4”. In addition, when the total number of reserved memories is less than “3”, the variation pattern type is determined with reference to a common determination table, while the total number of reserved memories is “3”. The change pattern type may be determined by referring to a different determination table when the total number of reserved memories is “4”. Alternatively, instead of the total number of reserved memories, the variation pattern type is determined by referring to a different determination table depending on whether the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are equal to or greater than a predetermined number. You may do it. In this case, when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, “3” or the like), the variation pattern type includes a variation pattern that has a shorter variable display time than when it is less than the predetermined number. The determined value may be assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined to be higher. Alternatively, even when the gaming state is a probabilistic state or a short time state, it is determined whether or not the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “1” or the like), and different determination tables are set according to the determination result. The change pattern type may be determined with reference to the reference. For example, if the total number of stored storages is less than a predetermined number in the probability variation state or the time reduction state, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C is selected as the use table, while the probability variation state or the time reduction state exists. Sometimes, if the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D may be selected as the use table.

  In the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is the variation pattern type CA1-. 1 to a variation pattern type CA1-3 and a variation pattern type CA2-1 to a variation pattern type CA2-4. In the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, a determination value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type is different. There is a part. For example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, assignment of determination values to the variation pattern type CA1-3 and the variation pattern type CA2-1 is different. . Thereby, the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied depending on whether or not the variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shortened.

  Further, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, there are portions where determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types. For example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C, determination values are not assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2 and the variation pattern type CA2-3, while the variation pattern type CA1-1 and the variation pattern A decision value is assigned to the type CA2-2. On the other hand, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, no determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-1 or the variation pattern type CA2-2, while the variation pattern type CA1-2. In addition, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA2-3. As a result, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on whether or not the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened.

  In this embodiment, when the special figure display result is “losing” and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of “230” to “251”, the gaming state and the total number of reserved memories Regardless, the variation pattern type CA2-4 including a variation pattern with super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is determined. That is, when the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like is any one of “230” to “251”, at least super reach is involved regardless of the gaming state and the total number of reserved memories. The variable display of the decorative design is executed.

  When the special figure display result is determined to be “losing”, the determined value for each variation pattern type depends on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probable variation state, or a short-time state. The assignment may be different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same fluctuation | variation pattern classification can be varied according to which of a plurality of types of gaming states. In addition, when the special figure display result is determined to be “losing”, the determined value is set to a different variation pattern type depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability variation state, or a short-time state. It may be assigned. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states.

  In this embodiment, by referring to the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, the variation pattern type CA1-1 to the variation pattern type CA1-3 and the variation The pattern type can be determined as any one of the pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4. Here, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 correspond to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach” as shown in FIG. 7B. It is a variation pattern type. The variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4 are variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”. Accordingly, by determining the variation pattern type based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type with reference to the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, It can be determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state.

  The determination values assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2 and the variation pattern type CA1-3 in the loss variation pattern type determination table (shortening) 132D are the variation patterns in the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal) 132C. It is larger than the determined value assigned to the type CA1-1 and the variation pattern type CA1-3. With such a setting, when the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is shortened, it is determined that the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is not set to the reach state at a higher rate than when the variable symbol is not shortened. If the average variable display time in the non-reach fluctuation pattern is set to be shorter than the average variable display time in the reach fluctuation pattern, the total reserved storage number is a predetermined number (specifically, “ 3 ") or more, the average variable display time can be shortened compared to when it is less than the predetermined number, and when it is in the probabilistic state or the short time state, the total number of stored storages in the normal state As compared with a case where is less than a predetermined number (specifically, “3”), the average variable display time can be shortened.

  FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a loss variation pattern determination table 133A shown in FIG. 11A and a hit variation pattern determination table 133B shown in FIG. 11B are prepared in advance as variation pattern determination tables.

  The loss variation pattern determination table 133A is based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the determination result of the variation pattern type, etc., when it is determined (preliminarily determined) that the special figure display result is “lost”. It is a table referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. In the loss variation pattern determination table 133A, according to the variation pattern type, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is one corresponding to the case where the special figure display result is “lost”. Alternatively, it is assigned to a plurality of variation patterns (loss variation patterns).

  In the loss variation pattern determination table 133A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern PA1-3 corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is CA1-3. As shown in FIG. 7A, the variation pattern PA1-3 is a variation pattern that executes a variable display effect of “slip” when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. is there. With such a setting, even when the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable pattern effect such as “slip” is executed by being determined by the variation pattern PA1-3. Can do. Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table 133A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern PA1-4 corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is CA1-3. As shown in FIG. 7 (A), the fluctuation patterns PA1-4 have pseudo continuous fluctuations with a variable display effect of “pseudo continuous” when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. This is a variation pattern in which (revariation) is executed once. With such a setting, even when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed by being determined as the variation pattern PA1-4. Can do.

  It should be noted that the ratio determined for the variation pattern for executing the variable display effect may be different depending on whether or not the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is shortened. As an example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D shown in FIG. 10 (D), a smaller determination value than the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal) 132C shown in FIG. What is necessary is just to make it assign with respect to pattern classification CA1-3. In the variation pattern setting example shown in FIG. 7A, the special pattern variation time (variable display time of the special symbol) in the variation pattern PA1-1 in which the variable display effects such as “pseudo-run” and “slip” are not executed is 12000. In milliseconds [ms], the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 is set to 3000 milliseconds [ms]. On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 for executing the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is 16000 milliseconds [ms] in the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 for executing the variable display effect of “slip”. The special figure fluctuation time in is set to 24000 [ms]. That is, when the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the special pattern change time in the change pattern PA1-3 for executing the “slip” variable display effect, or the change pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. The special figure fluctuation time in PA1-4 is longer than the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern in which these variable display effects are not executed.

  For example, when the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “3”) or more, there is a variation pattern for executing variable display effects such as “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous” compared to a case where the total number is less than the predetermined number. A determination value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for the included variation pattern types CA1-3 is low. As a result, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average variable display time can be shortened compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. Further, for example, in the case of the probability change state or the short time state, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type CA1-3 is larger than that in the normal state when the total number of reserved memories is less than a predetermined number (eg, “3”) A determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so as to be lower. As a result, the average variable display time can be shortened when the probability change state or the time reduction state is set, compared to when the total number of reserved storage is less than the predetermined number in the normal state.

  The hit variation pattern determination table 133B has a variation pattern determination disturbance according to the determination result of the variation pattern type when the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined). This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the numerical value MR4. In the hit variation pattern determination table 133B, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type indicates that the special figure display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Are assigned to one or more variation patterns (per variation pattern) corresponding to.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board 16. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 12, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 12 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a game control flag setting unit 152, a game control timer setting unit 153, and a game. A control counter setting unit 154 and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure storage unit 151A is a special game in which a game ball wins a first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting condition is satisfied but the first starting condition is not satisfied. The hold data of (a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates with a holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and sets the first start condition by the winning (game ball detection). Based on the establishment, numerical data indicating various random values extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 is set as reserved data and stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). In this embodiment, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, Is stored in the first special figure storage unit 151A as the storage data.

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B receives the game ball at the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start condition is satisfied, but the second start condition is not satisfied. Hold data of a game (a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates the holding number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening and sets the second start condition by the winning (game ball detection). The numerical data indicating various random values extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment is used as the hold data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). In this embodiment, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, Is stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 151B as holding data.

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, a big hit middle flag, and the like.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. In step S15 of FIG. 19 executed for control and the special symbol process shown in FIG. 20, which process is to be selected and executed is instructed. The ordinary symbol process flag indicates which process should be selected and executed in the ordinary symbol process shown in step S16 of FIG. 19 in order to control the progress of the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20. Instruct.

  The big hit flag is set to an on state in response to a determination (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off in response to the big hit symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. The small hit flag is set to the on state in response to a determination (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “small hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off in response to, for example, the small hit symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game.

  The probability change flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the probability change state, and is cleared to the off state in response to the end of the probability change state. . The time reduction flag is set to the on state in response to the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being in the probability change state or the time reduction state and the time reduction control is started, while the probability change state or the time reduction state is ended. It is cleared and turned off in response to. The big hit flag is set to the on state in response to the start of the big hit gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while being cleared in response to the end of the big hit gaming state and the off state. Become.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, the time for controlling the progress of the big hit gaming state on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the big hit gaming state, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the game control process timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time, such as the start time of the big hit gaming state, and counts up periodically.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game, such as a special symbol variable display time (special figure variation time) in the special figure game. . As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The usual figure variation timer is for measuring the time for controlling the progress of the usual figure game such as a variable symbol display time (ordinary figure variation time) in the ordinary figure game on the main board 11 side. . As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time change timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting a count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a random counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, a total reserved memory number counter, a short time counter, a round number counter, and the like. .

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 is a numerical value extracted from the random number circuit 104 or a part of numerical data indicating a random number value used for controlling the progress of the game, separately from the random number circuit 104. This is for the CPU 103 to count the data so that it can be updated by software. For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR5 is stored as random count values. The numerical data indicating the numerical value is updated. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. Alternatively, the random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second reserved memory number is stored as the second reserved memory number count value, and is updated in accordance with the increase or decrease of the second reserved memory number (for example, 1 Addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total pending memory count is stored in the total pending memory count counter as the total pending memory count count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction) in response to an increase or decrease in the total pending memory count )

  The time reduction counter is used to count the number of remaining special-purpose games that can be executed until the time reduction control is ended when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the time reduction state. For example, when the jackpot gaming state is ended, data indicating the count initial value “100” corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value being “0” is set as the hourly count count value in the hourly number counter. . Thereafter, until the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the time count count value is subtracted by 1 every time the special figure game is finished. Then, when the time reduction count value reaches “0”, the time reduction flag is cleared and turned off, for example, to control to end the time reduction state and shift to the normal state.

  The round number counter is for counting the number of round games executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round game is finished and the next round game is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated.

  Game control buffer setting unit 155 Various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are provided. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a start port buffer, a variation special figure designation buffer, a big hit type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer includes a plurality of buffer areas (for example, “12”), and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 101 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area where setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  The starting port buffer stores a buffer value indicating whether a game ball that has entered the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port is detected. As an example, the start port buffer value is set to “1” in response to the normal detection of a game ball that has entered the first start winning port by the first start port switch 22A. Further, “2” is set to the start port buffer value in response to the normal detection of the game ball that has entered the second start winning port by the second start port switch 22B.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, “1” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Further, “2” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, in response to the end of the special figure game, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0”.

  The big hit type buffer stores a buffer value corresponding to a determination result in which the big hit type is one of a plurality of types when the variable display result is “big hit”. As an example, based on the setting in the big hit type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 9, if the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “0”, and the big hit type is “probable change”. If there is, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “1”, and if the jackpot type is “surprise”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “2”.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. Alternatively, the effect control CPU 120 may be built in the effect control microcomputer, while at least one of the ROM 121 and the RAM 122 may be externally attached to the effect control microcomputer. The random number circuit 124 may be any one that is built in or externally attached to the production control microcomputer. In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring and the like for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data are connected to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, the effect control board 12 is also connected to wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action on the operation unit 30 has been detected from the operation detection switch 31.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. FIG. 13 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 12, numerical data indicating the random value SR1 for determining the continuous effect start and the random value SR2 for determining the continuous effect pattern can be counted. Controlled. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the final stop symbol used for determining a final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes a variable display result of the decorative symbol may be controlled to be countable.

  The effect control CPU 120 uses various random counters different from the random number circuit 124 such as a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of the numerical values SR1 and SR2 may be counted. Alternatively, by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing and calculation processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 124, the numerical data indicating all or part of the rendering random number is updated. You may make it do. When the random number circuit 124 is not mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 may count numerical data indicating all the effect random numbers using a random counter.

  The random effect value SR1 for determining the start of the continuous effect is a random value used for determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “51”. In this embodiment, whether or not the continuous effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120 or the like on the side of the effect control board 12 differs depending on the value of the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer (continuous effect start condition establishment buffer value). Determined by percentage.

  The random value SR2 for determining the continuous effect pattern is an effect operation in the case where the continuous effect is executed, that is, the shape of the display part at each time of the variable display of the decorative pattern for which the continuous effect is executed a plurality of times and the effect mode in the continuous effect. Is a random value used to determine any one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “301”.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the production control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and controls.

  FIG. 14 shows a configuration example of the continuous effect start determination table 160 stored in the ROM 121. The continuous effect start determination table 160 is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to start the continuous effect based on the random value SR1 for determining the start of the continuous effect. In the continuous production start determination table 160, is the value of the continuous production start condition establishment buffer (continuous production start condition establishment buffer value) provided in the production control buffer setting unit 194 shown in FIG. 18 “1” or “3”? Depending on whether it is “2” or “4”, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR1 for determining the start of the continuous effect corresponds to the determination result corresponding to the start of the continuous effect or no start of the continuous effect. (Continuous production start presence / absence) is assigned.

  Here, the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer is the variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like on the main board 11 side at the time of starting winning when the game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening (start winning prize) is detected. Based on the determination that the random number value MR3 for determination is within the range of the super reach variation pattern common range that is determined to be at least the super reach variation pattern regardless of the total number of reserved memories, the value is “1”. Is updated. In addition, the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer is a special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like on the main board 11 side at the time of starting winning when a game ball entering (starting winning) is detected in the first start winning opening. The random number value MR1 for determination is updated to “2” when it is determined that the variable display result matches the determination value that is “winning” such as “big hit” or “small hit”. The Further, the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer determines the variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like on the main board 11 side at the time of starting winning when a game ball that has entered (starting winning) is detected in the second start winning opening. Is determined to be within the common range of the super reach variation pattern that is determined to be at least a super reach variation pattern regardless of the total number of reserved memories, the value is “3”. Updated to The continuous effect start condition establishment buffer is a special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like on the main board 11 side at the time of starting winning when the game ball that has entered (starting winning) is detected in the second start winning opening. The random number value MR1 for determination is updated to “4” when it is determined that the variable display result matches the determination value that is “winning” such as “big hit” or “small hit”. The

  In the setting example of the continuous production start determination table 160 shown in FIG. 14, depending on whether the continuous production start condition establishment buffer value provided in “1” or “3” is “2” or “4”. The assignment of the decision value to the decision result of whether or not to start continuous production is different. With such a setting, it is possible to vary the determination ratio of whether or not to start the continuous effect depending on whether or not the random value MR3 extracted at the time of starting winning is within the common range of the super reach variation pattern. it can. Further, in the setting example of the continuous production start determination table 160 illustrated in FIG. 14, when the continuous production start condition establishment buffer value is “2” or “4”, the continuous production start condition establishment buffer value is “1” or “ More determination values than those in the case of “3” are assigned to the determination result with the start of continuous production. With such a setting, when the random display value MR1 extracted at the time of winning a start matches the determined value for which the variable display result is “hit” such as “big hit” or “small hit”, it does not match It is possible to make a decision to start the continuous production at a higher rate than that. Therefore, when the continuous production is executed, the expectation that the variable display result will be “hit” such as “big hit” or “small hit” is improved and the interest of the game is improved than when the continuous production is not executed. Can be made.

  FIG. 15 shows a configuration example of the continuous performance pattern determination table 161 stored in the ROM 121. When the continuous effect is executed, the continuous effect pattern determination table 161 illustrated in FIG. 15 is based on the random value SR2 for determining the continuous effect pattern, and the continuous effect pattern RP1-1 to the continuous effect pattern RP1-3. Use from a plurality of continuous effect patterns such as pattern RP2-1 to continuous effect pattern RP2-3, continuous effect pattern RP3-1 to continuous effect pattern RP3-3, continuous effect pattern RP4-1 to continuous effect pattern RP4-3 It is a table referred to for determining a pattern. In the continuous effect pattern determination table 161, whether the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer value is “1”, “3”, “2” or “4”, or provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 193 shown in FIG. The numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value SR2 for determining the continuous effect pattern in accordance with the initial value (continuous effect count initial value) of the continuous effect counter is the continuous effect pattern RP1-1 to the continuous effect pattern RP1. -3, continuous production pattern RP2-1 to continuous production pattern RP2-3, continuous production pattern RP3-1 to continuous production pattern RP3-3, continuous production pattern RP4-1 to continuous production pattern RP4-3. ing.

  FIG. 16 shows each continuous effect pattern RP1-1 to continuous effect pattern RP1-3, continuous effect pattern RP2-1 to continuous effect pattern RP2-3, continuous effect pattern RP3-1 to continuous effect pattern RP3-3, continuous effect pattern. The example of the setting of the display part shape in the continuous production | presentation by the continuous production | presentation by RP4-1 to continuous production pattern RP4-3, and the continuous production | production is shown. In the setting example shown in FIG. 16, each of the continuous effect patterns RP1-1 to RP1-3, the continuous effect pattern RP2-1 to the continuous effect pattern RP2-3, the continuous effect pattern RP3-1 to the continuous effect pattern RP3-3. In the continuous production by the continuous production pattern RP4-1 to the continuous production pattern RP4-3, production contents such as the presence / absence of the continuous production mode using the operation buttons 32 are set in advance. Here, the continuous effect count value is a count value of a continuous effect counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. For example, when the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer value is “1” corresponding to the start of the continuous effect, the value of the first variation number counter (first variation number count value) is the initial value of the continuous effect count. When the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer value is “3” or “4”, the value of the second variation number counter is set as the continuous effect count value. After that, every time the decorative symbol variable display is executed, it is updated to subtract one.

  The first variation count value is updated by adding 1 when the first start port winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is the first winning determination result notification command. Further, when the first variation count value is other than “0”, the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is the second winning determination result notification command or the third winning determination result notification command. Also when it is, 1 is added and updated. On the other hand, when the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is the fourth winning determination result notification command, the first variation count value is updated to “0”. On the other hand, the second variation count value is updated by adding 1 when the second start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is the fifth winning determination result notification command. Further, when the second variation count value is other than “0”, the second start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is the sixth winning determination result notification command or the seventh winning determination result notification command. Also when it is, 1 is added and updated. On the other hand, when the second start port winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is the eighth winning determination result notification command, the first variation count value is updated to “0”.

  Such continuous production pattern RP1-1 to continuous production pattern RP1-3, continuous production pattern RP2-1 to continuous production pattern RP2-3, continuous production pattern RP3-1 to continuous production pattern RP3-3, and continuous production pattern RP4-1. By executing the continuous effect by the continuous effect pattern RP4-3, in the continuous effect, the shape of the display part is changed, or the image or character displayed on the image display device 5 is changed according to the operation of the operation button 32. Continuous effects (continuous effect pattern RP2-1 to continuous effect pattern RP2-3, continuous effect pattern RP4-1 to continuous effect pattern RP4-3) can be executed.

  In the setting example of the continuous effect pattern determination table 161 shown in FIG. 15, the continuous effect pattern depends on whether the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer value is “1”, “3”, “2”, or “4”. RP1-1 to continuous effect pattern RP1-3, continuous effect pattern RP2-1 to continuous effect pattern RP2-3, continuous effect pattern RP3-1 to continuous effect pattern RP3-3, continuous effect pattern RP4-1 to continuous effect pattern RP4 -3 assignment is different. Specifically, when the continuous production start condition establishment buffer value is “1” or “3”, the continuous production pattern is compared to the case where the continuous production start condition establishment buffer value is “2” or “4”. Many determined values are assigned to continuous effect patterns such as RP1-1 to continuous effect patterns RP1-3 that are not executed using the operation buttons 32. On the other hand, when the continuous production start condition establishment buffer value is “2” or “4”, the continuous production start condition establishment buffer value is “1” or “3” compared to the case where the continuous production start condition establishment buffer value is “1” or “3”. Many determined values are assigned to the continuous effect patterns in which the continuous effect using the operation buttons 32 such as the pattern RP4-1 to the continuous effect pattern RP4-3 is executed. Therefore, depending on whether or not the continuous production using the operation button 32 is executed, the possibility that the variable display of the decorative pattern by the specific variation pattern with super reach is executed is changed. It is possible to improve the fun of the game by changing the sense of expectation that it will be a fluctuation pattern with a super reach that has a high probability of being a "big hit" (big hit reliability).

  In this embodiment, in the continuous effect pattern RP2-1 to the continuous effect pattern RP2-3 and the continuous effect pattern RP4-1 to the continuous effect pattern RP4-3, the image display device is operated in response to the pressing operation on the operation button 32. An effect of reducing the number of people displayed in 5 is executed. More specifically, with respect to the initial number display of 100 people, in the continuous production of the continuous production pattern RP2-1 to the continuous production pattern RP2-3, the number of people is reduced by 5 according to the pressing operation on the operation button 32. Let In the continuous production of the continuous production pattern RP4-1 to the continuous production pattern RP4-3, the display of the number of persons is decreased by 10 according to the pressing operation on the operation button 32. That is, the display of the number of people is easier to reduce in the continuous effect pattern RP4-1 to the continuous effect pattern RP4-3 than in the continuous effect pattern RP2-1 to the continuous effect pattern RP2-3. When the continuous production start condition establishment buffer value is “1” or “3”, the continuous production patterns RP2-1 to RP2-1 are compared to the case where the continuous production start condition establishment buffer value is “2” or “4”. Many determination values are assigned to the continuous performance pattern RP2-3. On the other hand, when the continuous production start condition establishment buffer value is “2” or “4”, the continuous production start condition establishment buffer value is “1” or “3” compared to the case where the continuous production start condition establishment buffer value is “1” or “3”. Many determined values are assigned to the patterns RP4-1 to RP4-3. Therefore, depending on whether or not the display of the number of people tends to decrease in response to the pressing operation of the operation button 32, the possibility of the variable display result being a “big hit” (the big hit reliability) is changed to improve the interest of the game. Can be made.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes the image display device 5, speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, a light emitter such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, operation buttons 32, and movable members included in the effect item. In order to control the production operation using the production device (production electrical component) including a plurality of types, pattern data constituting the production control pattern is stored in advance. As such an effect control pattern, for example, a design variation control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, a continuous effect control pattern, a hit effect control pattern, and the like may be included.

  The symbol variation control pattern relates to a variable display operation of the decorative symbol in the display area of the image display device 5 in a period from when the decorative symbol variable display is started to when the final decorative symbol which is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. What is necessary is just to be comprised in advance by the pattern data etc. which show the content of control, and for every variation pattern of a decoration design. Further, different symbol variation control patterns may be prepared corresponding to a plurality of types of effect modes in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Each of the plurality of symbol variation control patterns includes a decorative symbol display position and a decorative symbol display position in a variable symbol display performed using a final symbol that is a final stop symbol, a temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped during variable display, and the like. It is only necessary to define a time schedule such as the size, the direction of variation of the decorative pattern, and the variation speed. Here, the final stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol, etc. are determined at the start of variable display based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. If it is.

  The notice effect control pattern may be composed of pattern data indicating the control content of the effect operation in the notice effect, and may be prepared in advance for each of the notice effect patterns corresponding to the contents of the effect operation in the notice effect. For example, each of the plurality of notice effect control patterns is prepared in advance to execute a plurality of notice patterns prepared in advance for executing a notice effect of “character notice” or a notice effect of “notice in operation”. Corresponding to one of the plurality of notice patterns, the display position and size of the effect image, the update display procedure, the setting of the operation valid period for effectively detecting the operation action on the operation button 32, and the switching of the effect operation at the time of detecting the operation It is only necessary to define a time schedule such as setting.

  The continuous effect control pattern may be composed of pattern data indicating the control content of the effect operation in the continuous effect, and may be prepared in advance according to the content (notification content) of the effect operation in the continuous effect. For example, the plurality of continuous production control patterns are each of the continuous production pattern RP1-1 to the continuous production pattern RP1-3, the continuous production pattern RP2-1 to the continuous production pattern RP2-3, and the continuous production pattern RP3-1 to the continuous production pattern RP3. -3, continuous production pattern RP4-1 to continuous production pattern RP4-3, the time schedule and operation buttons 32 such as the shape of the display part and the production image in the continuous production according to the continuous production count value, etc. It is only necessary to define a time schedule such as setting of an operation valid period for effectively detecting an operation action on the, and setting of switching of an effect operation when an operation is detected.

  The win-time effect control pattern indicates the control contents of the effect operation in the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state after the special figure display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit” or “small hit”. The special figure display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, whether the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change” or “surprise change”, May be prepared in advance according to the presence / absence of promotion effect during the big hit.

  FIG. 17A shows a configuration example of such various effect control patterns. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 17A, the effect control pattern includes various effect operations such as an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and an end code. It is composed of process data serving as control data for control, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, timing control switching timing, and the like in time series.

  The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with an effect control process timer value that is a stored value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 shown in FIG. A determination value corresponding to the execution time (production time) of the production operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. The data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, data indicating the variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data indicating the voice output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects in conjunction with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol, for example. Yes. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data includes data indicating a lighting operation mode of the light emitter, such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED. That is, the lamp control data is data for designating the lighting operation of the light emitter. In the operation detection control data, for example, an operation operation period using the operation buttons 32, such as an operation effective period for effectively detecting an operation on the operation buttons 32, data for designating the control content of the effect operation when the operation buttons are detected effectively, and the like. Is included. These control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern configured to include a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be. Further, in the plural types of process data included in the effect control pattern, the types of control data constituting each process data may be different according to the contents of the effect operation executed at each timing. That is, there may be process data configured to include all of the display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and operation detection control data, or process data configured to include a part of these. Further, for example, various other control data such as movable member control data indicating an operation mode of the movable member included in the effect accessory may be included.

  FIG. 17B shows various rendering operations executed according to the content of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches one of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner specified by the sound control data, and control is performed to blink a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp control data. Control is performed to accept the operation on the operation button 32 during the operation valid period specified by the detection control data and determine the content of the effect. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that is not a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, when variable display of decorative symbols is started. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the corresponding effect control pattern is configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer determination values. If the production control process timer value matches, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data is performed. Control. Thus, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamps) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. The control of the light emitter such as 9) is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like is developed by reading out image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 is provided with an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 18, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. ing. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 18 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the effect image display state on the display screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count values in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various types of effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Control. The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for capturing various signals such as an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation detection switch 31, and the effect. And an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the control board 12. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound effect signal) transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 (Lighting signal) etc. are output.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs to the speakers 8L and 8R audio signals obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data, thereby generating sound and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when the power supply from the power supply board 16 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a loop process may be entered after executing a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the previous power supply stop. When the CPU 103 executing such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 19 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, whereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port are set via the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, a warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade. After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 19 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 21, the CPU 103 first corresponds to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A among the first start opening switch 22A and the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A provided in the ON state is on (step S201). At this time, if the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step S201; Yes), the start port buffer value that is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “1” is set (step S202).

  When the detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A is in the OFF state in step S201 (step S201; No), it is provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. It is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is on (step S203). At this time, if the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in an OFF state (step S203; No), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step S203; Yes), the start port buffer value is set to “2” (step S204).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S202 and S204, the CPU 103 reads the reserved storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S205). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read, and the starting port buffer value is When it is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the read value in step S205 has reached a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S206). At this time, if the read value in step S205 does not reach the upper limit value, the starting condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is effectively established. For example, when it is determined in step S201 that the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state, and in step S206, it is determined that the read value has not reached the upper limit value, the first special symbol. A first start condition for executing a special figure game using the first special figure by the display device 4A and variable display of decorative symbols is established. If it is determined in step S203 that the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state, and if it is determined in step S206 that the read value has not reached the upper limit value, the second special symbol. A second start condition is established for executing a special game using the second special figure by the display device 4B and a variable display of decorative symbols.

  Thus, when the read value has not reached the upper limit value in step S206 (step S206; No), 1 is added to the reserved storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, 1 is added to the first reserved memory number count value, and when the starting port buffer value is “2”, 1 is added to the second reserved memory number count value. Then, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the total pending storage number count value that is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter that indicates the total pending storage number that is the total value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number ( Step S208).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S208, the CPU 103, among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for type determination is extracted (step S209). The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value, thereby storing each random value (step S210). . For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  After the random value is stored in step S210, a winning specific pattern determination process is executed (step S211). Subsequently, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Is set (step S212). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 19 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  If the read value has reached the upper limit value in step S206 (step S206; Yes), or after executing the process of step S212, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2”. Determination is made (step S213). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S213; Yes), the starting port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S214), and then shown in FIG. The process proceeds to step S203. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S213; No), the starting port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S215), and then the starting winning prize is obtained. The determination process ends.

  22 and 23 are flowcharts showing an example of the winning specific pattern determination process executed in step S211 of FIG. In this embodiment, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol display result is displayed as “big hit” or “small hit” in special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 20, FIG. 25) described later. "Or whether or not the jackpot type is determined, and in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 20, FIG. 26) described later, the variation pattern type and the variation pattern are determined. . On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning specific pattern determination processing in step S211 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). Thus, it is specified in advance whether or not the special figure display result is a “big hit” and whether or not the decorative pattern variation pattern is a variation pattern accompanied by at least super reach. Thus, it is predicted that the reach effect of the super reach will be executed before the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, and based on this prediction result, On the control board 12 side, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the continuous effect.

  In the winning specific pattern determination process shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the CPU 103 first determines whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S350A in FIG. 22). Here, if the start port buffer value is “1” in step S364 (step S350A; “1”), the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction control in the probability variation state or the time reduction state is being executed is set. It is determined whether or not (step S350B). The time reduction flag is set to the on state when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the probability change state or the time reduction state, and is cleared to the off state when the probability change state or the time reduction state ends. More specifically, after the hour / hour flag is set to ON in the process of ending the big hit gaming state, the hour / hour count count value has reached “0”, or the special figure display result is “big hit”. Corresponding to the end of the game, the time reduction flag is cleared and the game is turned off.

  If the hourly flag is OFF in step S350B (step S350B; No), it is determined whether or not a big hit flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is set is set (step S350C). The big hit flag is set to an on state when the big hit gaming state is controlled, and is cleared to an off state when the big hit gaming state ends. Here, if the big hit flag is off (step S350C; No), or if it is determined in step S350A that the start port buffer value is “2” (step S350A; “2”), A special figure display result corresponding to the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S209 of FIG. 21 is specified (step S351). For example, in the process of step S351, the special figure display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 8 is selected and set in the usage table. Here, when setting to the use table, the storage address (head address) of the table data in the ROM 101 may be set, for example, in a table pointer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. Subsequently, by referring to the special figure display result determination table 130 set in the use table, the special figure display result corresponding to the random value MR1 extracted in step S209 is specified. More specifically, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is compared with the determined value stored in the special figure display result determination table 130, and the special figure display to which the determined value matching the random value MR1 is assigned. Specify whether the result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”. Here, regardless of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is specified by referring to the table data corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the short time state in the special figure display result determination table 130. That's fine.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result specified in step S351 is “lost” (step S352). At this time, if the specified special figure display result is “lost” (step S352; Yes), the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S209 of FIG. 21 is the non-reach variation pattern common range. It is determined whether it is within the range (step S353).

  Here, in the setting examples of the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C shown in FIG. 10C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D shown in FIG. Regardless of the number of memories, if the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of “1” to “99”, at least a variation pattern type including a variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern) with no reach effect. It will be determined as one of CA1-1 to CA1-3. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 24, if the random value MR3 is in the range of “1” to “99”, it is determined that it is within the non-reach fluctuation pattern common range. In step S353, this non-reach fluctuation pattern common It may be determined whether or not it is within the range.

  When it is determined in step S353 that it is within the non-reach fluctuation pattern common range (step S353; Yes), it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S354). If the start port buffer value is “1” (step S354; “1”), the first start port winning designation command is used to notify that the first reach winning pattern is within the non-reach variation pattern common range. After setting for transmitting the 1st prize determination result notification command B100H (see FIG. 5C) from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S355), the winning specific pattern determination process is terminated. To do.

  When it is determined in step S354 that the start port buffer value is “2” (step S354; “2”), the second notification that the non-reach variation pattern is within the common range at the time of the second start winning is made. After setting for transmitting the fifth prize determination result notification command B200H (see FIG. 5C), which is a start opening prize designation command, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S356), The specific pattern determination process at the time of winning is completed.

  When it is determined in step S353 that it is not within the non-reach variation pattern common range (step S353; No), the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S209 in FIG. 21 is common to the super reach variation pattern. It is determined whether it is within the range (step S357).

  Here, in the setting examples of the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C shown in FIG. 10C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D shown in FIG. Regardless of the number of memories, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of “230” to “251”, at least super reach (super reach α or super reach) regardless of the gaming state or the total number of reserved memories. The variation pattern type CA2-4 including the variation pattern (super reach variation pattern) with reach β) is determined. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 24, if the random value MR3 is within the range of “230” to “251”, it is determined that it is within the common range of the super reach variation pattern. It may be determined whether or not it is within the range.

  When it is determined in step S357 that it is within the common range of the super reach variation pattern (step S357; Yes), it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S358). If the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S358; “1”), the second starting port winning designation command is used to notify that it is within the common range of the super reach variation pattern at the time of the first starting winning. After setting for transmitting the 1st prize determination result notification command B101H (see FIG. 5C) from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S359), the winning specific pattern determination process is terminated. To do. If it is determined in step S358 that the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S358; “2”), the second notification that the super-reach variation pattern is within the common range at the time of the second starting winning is made. After setting for transmitting a sixth winning determination result notification command B201H (see FIG. 5C), which is a start opening winning designation command, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S360), The specific pattern determination process at the time of winning is completed.

  When it is determined in step S357 that it is not within the common range of the super reach variation pattern (step S357; No), it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S361). If the start port buffer value is “1” (step S361; “1”), the first start notification is made that it is not within the non-reach variation pattern common range or the super reach variation pattern common range at the first start winning. After setting for transmitting a fourth prize determination result notification command B103H (see FIG. 5C), which is a start opening prize designation command, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S362), The specific pattern determination process at the time of winning is completed. If it is determined in step S350A that the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S350A; “1”), and the time-short flag or big hit flag is on (step S350B or S350C; Yes), The process of specifying the special figure display result and the process of determining whether or not the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the non-reach variation pattern common range (steps S351 to S353) are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S361. The process proceeds to a setting for transmitting the fourth prize determination result notification command B103H from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Thus, in this embodiment, during the execution of the time reduction control (during high base) or during the big hit gaming state, the determination for the first start winning is not performed.

  If it is determined in step S361 that the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S361; “2”), even within the non-reach variation pattern common range at the time of the second start winning, it is within the super reach variation pattern common range. However, a setting for transmitting an eighth winning determination result notification command B203H (see FIG. 5C), which is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that, is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. After performing (step S363), the winning specific pattern determining process is terminated.

  Even when it is determined in step S352 that the special figure display result is not “lost” (step S352; No), it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (FIG. 23 step S364). Here, if the starting port buffer value is “1” in step S364 (step S364; “1”), the variable display result at the first start winning is “winning” such as “big hit” or “small hit”. A setting for transmitting a third prize determination result notification command B102H (see FIG. 5C), which is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying this, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed. From (Step S365), the winning specific pattern determination process is terminated. When it is determined in step S364 that the start port buffer value is “2” (step S364; “2”), the variable display result at the second start winning is “winning” such as “big hit” or “small hit”. Is a setting for transmitting the seventh winning determination result notification command B202H (see FIG. 5C), which is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the main board 11 is transmitted to the effect control board 12. (Step S366), the winning specific pattern determination process is terminated.

  By executing such a specific pattern determination process at the time of winning, when a game ball that has passed through the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening is detected, the gaming state or special figure game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suspended. Regardless of the total number of pending storage as the number of memories, whether or not at least the variable display result is a “hit” such as “big hit” or “small hit”, or at least whether it is a fluctuation pattern without a reach effect, It is specified whether or not at least a super reach variation pattern with super reach is obtained, and different first start port winning designation commands and second start opening winning designation commands are sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 according to the specified result. Can be transmitted.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 shown in FIG. Execute the process.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 151A and the second special diagram reservation storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display device 4B. In the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B). Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types based on the result of determining whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, Corresponding to the determination result of the pattern type, a process of determining the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types is included.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. This includes the process of measuring. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is a stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or incremented by one. Regardless of whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, a common timer is used. The elapsed time is measured. It is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation process in step S112 is performed by the first special symbol display device 4A using the first special symbol in the special symbol game, or by the second special symbol display device 4B. It suffices if it is a process for controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the game by a common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed. A process for setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag or the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on. When the big hit flag is on, the special process flag value is set to “ Update to 4 ". When the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. Further, when both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are OFF, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is a process for starting the execution of the round in the big winning gaming state and setting the winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”. Etc. are included. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set according to whether the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”. As an example, when the big hit type is controlled to the 15 round big hit state corresponding to “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the upper limit of the period in which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”. In addition to the setting, the number of times of opening of the big winning opening, which is the number of round games executed, is set to “15 times”. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprise” and controlled to the two round big hit state, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”. At the same time, the number of times of opening of the big prize opening, which is the number of round games executed, is set to “2 times”.

  The special winning opening open process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. This process during opening of the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the elapsed time measured, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. Processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door may be executed.

  The special winning opening opening post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The post-opening process for the big prize opening includes a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big prize opening is in an open state has reached the maximum number of open big prize openings, It includes a process for making a setting to send an end designation command when hit.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. Processing that waits until time elapses, processing that performs various settings for controlling to a probable change state and a short time state corresponding to the jackpot type, and the like are included.

  The small hit release pre-processing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits is a setting for starting the execution of variable winning action in the small hit gaming state and opening the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit” The processing that performs is included. At this time, for example, in response to the variable display result being “small hit”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds” and the big winning opening in the variable winning operation is set. The number of times of opening may be set to “twice”.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. This small hit opening process is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state and the measured elapsed time. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door may be executed.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hit end process, there is a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the presentation operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is executed by the presentation device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. Processing that waits until the time has passed is included. Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 25, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the total reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 is “0”, that is, the first reserved memory count. It is determined whether or not the total reserved memory number that is the total value of the second reserved memory numbers is “0” (step S231). At this time, if the total pending storage count value is other than “0” (step S231; No), the total pending storage count is updated by 1 by subtracting 1 from the total pending storage count count, for example. (Step S232).

  Following the processing of step S232, for example, whether or not the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 is “0”, that is, the second reserved memory number is “0”. It is determined whether or not (step S233). When it is determined in step S233 that the second reserved memory number count value is “0” (step S233; Yes), a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed. In response to the establishment of the first start condition to be started, the variable special figure designation buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” (step S234). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S233 that the second reserved memory number count value is other than “0” (step S233; No), the special symbol using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is used. In response to the establishment of the second start condition for starting the figure game, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” (step S235).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S234 and S235, the hold data is read from the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value (step S236). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the special figure display result determination result is used as the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A. The numerical data indicating the random number MR1, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are respectively read out. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the special figure display is performed as the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the result, numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are read out. The numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR1 to MR3 read out in this way is temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, for example, by storing it in a special figure changing random value buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. It only has to be done.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S236, 1 is subtracted from the reserved memory number count value corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value, and the special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value starts from the holding number “1”. The storage contents of the hold data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted up by one entry (step S237). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1 and the storage contents of the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A are stored one entry at a time. Shift to the top. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and the storage content of the reserved data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is Shift one entry up.

  Following the processing of step S237, a special figure display is used as a use table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is a variable symbol display result, is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”. The result determination table 130 is selected and set (step S238). The CPU 103 refers to the special figure display result determination table 130 set in this way, so that the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read in step S237 is “big hit” or “small Whether to display the special figure display result as "big hit", "small hit", or "lose" depending on which of the decision values assigned to each special figure display result of "Bon" or "Lose" Is determined (step S239). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S239 is “big hit” (step S240).

  If it is determined in step S240 that the game is a “hit” (step S240; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S241). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S242). By referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in this way, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type read in step S236, the “non-probability change”, “probability change”, “surprise change”, etc. A plurality of jackpot types prepared are determined (step S243). In addition, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S235, since the determined value is not assigned to the big hit type of “surprise” in the big hit type determination table 131, The jackpot type is not determined to be “accurate”. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, the determined jackpot type is stored, for example, by updating the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 ( Step S244). As an example, if the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the big hit type buffer value may be “0”, “probable change” may be “1”, and “surprise” may be “2”.

  If it is determined in step S240 that it is not “big hit” (step S240; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S245). When it is determined that the game is “small hit” (step S245; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S246).

  If it is determined in step S245 that it is not “small hit” (step S245; No), or after performing any of the processes in steps S244 and S246, is it controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state? A predetermined special symbol is set corresponding to the result of the prior determination of whether or not, and further, the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state (step S247). As an example, when it is determined in step S245 that the special figure display result is not “small hit”, the figure is a lost pattern corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “lost”. The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S245 that the special figure display result is “small hit”, the small figure corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number “2” as the winning symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. If it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the big hit symbols “1”, “3”, “7” are determined according to the big hit type determination result in step S243. Any of the special symbols indicating the numbers "" is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that becomes the non-probable big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probable big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. In accordance with the determination result that the big hit type is “accuracy”, the special symbol indicating the number of the big hit symbol “1” is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S247, the special symbol process flag value is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S248), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . If the total number of reserved memories is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step S249), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. In the demonstration display setting in step S250, a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. On the other hand, it is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not yet transmitted, the transmission setting of the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed by setting the storage address of the customer waiting demonstration designation command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, for example. The customer waiting demonstration designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 19 after the special symbol process is completed. Is done.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 26, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types (step S261). S262). Further, for example, by reading the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155, it is specified whether the jackpot type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” (step S263). ).

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S264). If the small hit flag is ON (step S264; Yes), the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types ( Step S265).

  When the small hit flag is OFF in step S264 (step S264; No), it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction control in the probability variation state or the time reduction state is being executed is set (step S264). S266).

  When the time reduction flag is OFF in step S266 (step S266; No), it is determined whether or not the total reserved storage number count value is “3” or more (step S267). If the total reserved storage number is less than “3” (step S267; No), the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types. Is selected and set (step S268). On the other hand, when the time reduction flag is on in step S266 (step S266; Yes), or when the total reserved storage number count value is “3” or more in step S267 (step S267; Yes), the fluctuation occurs. A loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of pattern types (step S269). Even when the time reduction flag is on in step S266, it is determined whether or not the total number of reserved storage is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, “1” or the like), and a different determination table is set according to the determination result. You may choose. For example, when the hourly flag is on, if the total reserved memory number is “0”, the process proceeds to step S268 to select and set the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C, while the total reserved memory number If the value is “1” or more, the process may proceed to step S269 to select and set the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S263, S265, S268, and S269, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type stored in the special figure variation random value buffer or the like. By referring to the use table set in any one of S263, S265, S268, and S269, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S270). Here, in the process of step S270, the variation pattern type determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like when detecting the start winning and stored as the hold data in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is performed. The variation pattern type is determined based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3. Therefore, it is possible to match the determination result of whether or not it is within the specific pattern common range at the time of detection of the start winning and the determination result of the variation pattern type by the process of step S270. In spite of being determined to be within the pattern common range, it is possible to prevent a variation pattern type different from a variation pattern type including a specific variation pattern with super reach from being determined. Also, based on the establishment of the first start condition, the first special symbol display device 4A determines the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol, or the second start Regardless of whether the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the condition is satisfied, a common random counter, etc. By using the numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type updated by the above, the common processing module can determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types.

  After the variation pattern type is determined in step S270, the loss variation pattern determination table 133A and the hit variation pattern determination are performed depending on whether the special figure display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”. One of the tables 133B is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns (step S271). Subsequently, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in step S271 based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern (step S272). The numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted from the random number circuit 104, the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, or the like when the process of step S272 is executed, or the first start winning prize The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A and the second special figure reservation memory, together with random numbers MR1 to MR3, are extracted when a game ball that has entered the mouth or the second start winning opening (start winning prize) is detected. You may memorize | store as pending data in the part 151B.

  In the process of step S272, whether or not the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol is determined by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the establishment of the first start condition, Regardless of whether the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the establishment of the second starting condition, a common random Using the numerical data indicating the common random number MR4 that is used for determining the variation pattern updated by a counter or the like, the variation pattern can be determined as one of a plurality of types by a common processing module. Further, in the process of step S272, regardless of the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S270, a plurality of types of variation patterns are generated by a common processing module using numerical data indicating the common random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Either can be determined.

  After the change pattern is determined in step S272, a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time corresponding to the change pattern determination result is set (step S273). Thereafter, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the above (step S274). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

  Subsequent to the process of step S274, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the special symbol change are performed (step S275). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. In the designated transmission command buffer, the data is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is a buffer designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Store in the area. When the setting in step S275 is performed, every time the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 19 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 applies to the effect control board 12. A gaming state designation command, a first variation start command or a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, and a pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result notification command is transmitted first, the first variation start command, the second variation start command, or the variation pattern designation command is transmitted. Alternatively, it may be transmitted in the order of the game state designation command and the pending storage number notification command. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S276), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 27, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S291). At this time, if the big hit flag is turned on (step S291; Yes), the big hit start production waiting time is set (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the jackpot start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S292, setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start specifying command corresponding to the big hit type buffer value is transmitted in the transmission command buffer. What is necessary is just to store in the buffer area | region designated with the pointer. Thereby, when the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 19 is executed after the special symbol stop process is finished, the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit type from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is executed. Is sent. After the setting in step S293, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S294). Also, settings are made to end the probability variation state and the time reduction state (step S295). For example, in the process of step S295, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the probability variation flag and the short time flag to turn off, a process of clearing the short time counter for counting the number of remaining special game games in the short time state, and the like. Just do it. Subsequently, the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S304). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S296), and then the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S291 (step S291; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S297). At this time, if the small hit flag is ON (step S297; Yes), a small hit start start waiting time is set (step S298). For example, in the process of step S298, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the small hitting start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer. Subsequently, as in the process of step S293, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S299). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S300). Also, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”, which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for small hits (step 301).

  If the small hit flag is off in step S297 (step S297; No), the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S302). After executing one of the processes in steps S301 and S302, it is determined whether or not the time-saving state is to be terminated (step S303), and the special symbol stop process is terminated. For example, in the process of step S303, when the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction count value which is the stored value of the time reduction counter is updated by, for example, subtracting one. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated short time count value matches a predetermined short time end determination value (for example, “0” or the like). At this time, if it coincides with the time reduction end determination value, the time reduction control in the time reduction state may be ended by clearing the time reduction flag and turning it off. On the other hand, if it does not coincide with the time reduction end determination value, the state of the time reduction flag may be maintained and the process of step S303 may be ended. It should be noted that for the probability variation state in which the time reduction flag is on and the probability variation flag is on, the time reduction control may be continuously performed until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to end the time reduction control even in the probability variation state, and the time reduction control may be ended based on the determination result that the time reduction control ends. In this way, when the time reduction control is ended, the probability variation control may be terminated at the same time, so that the normal state may be obtained. For the probability variation control, until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”, or further It may be continued until a predetermined number of special figure games are executed.

  In the process of step S303, for example, numerical data indicating a random value for probability variation control end determination is extracted from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, and probability variation control end determination stored in advance in the ROM 101 or the like is extracted. It may be determined whether or not the probability variation control is ended by referring to the table or when the number of executions of the special figure game during the probability variation control reaches a predetermined probability variation end determination value. On the other hand, in the process of step S303, the process for ending the probability variation control may not be executed, and the probability variation control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”. Alternatively, the process of determining whether or not to end the probability variation control based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the probability variation control end, for example, in step S231 shown in FIG. May be executed before determining (predetermined) the special figure display result in step S240.

  FIG. 28A is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 28 (A), the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the post-opening process of the big prize opening in step S116 shown in FIG. 20, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the effect waiting time at the end of big hit A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, “0” or the like). Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined according to whether or not the game has been done. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S311 (step S311; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end stage waiting time has elapsed in step S311 (step S311; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S312). Then, setting for starting control of the gaming state according to the read value in step S312 is performed (step S313). FIG. 28B shows a setting example in step S313. As shown in FIG. 28 (B), when the big hit type buffer read value is “0”, the setting for starting the control for changing the gaming state to the time-saving state is performed. At this time, for example, the CPU 103 sets the time reduction flag to the ON state, and sets a predetermined count initial value (for example, “100”) corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time reduction state. Set to the counter. When the big hit type buffer read value is “1” or “2”, a setting for starting control for changing the gaming state to the probable change state is performed. At this time, for example, the CPU 103 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to the on state.

  After the setting in step S313, the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is cleared to the off state (step S315), the special figure process flag is cleared, and the value is initialized to “0”. (Step S314), the jackpot ending process is terminated.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of power supply voltage is received from the power supply board 16 or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 29 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S401), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 to the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, the effect random number update process is executed (step S402), and among the effect random numbers used for effect control, numerical data indicating a random number value counted by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is displayed as software. Update with Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S403). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, CTC register settings.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is off in step S403 (step S403; No), the process returns to step S402. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on in step S403 (step S403; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S404), and command analysis processing is executed (step S405). . In the command analysis processing executed in step S405, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S405, the effect control process process is executed (step S406), and the process returns to step S402. In the effect control process in step S406, for example, an effect image display operation on the display screen of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and an effect object Regarding the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices, such as the driving operation of the movable member provided, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed.

  In the command analysis process in step S405, for example, a start winning command process as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31 may be executed. In the start winning command processing, when the first start opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is accompanied by a reach effect. It is determined whether or not it is within a common range determined for a non-reach variation pattern and whether or not it is within a common range determined for a super reach variation pattern with super reach. In the start winning command process shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a first start opening winning designation command has been received (step S501 in FIG. 30). The received effect control command is stored in the effect control command reception buffer, and the effect control CPU 120 reads the command stored in the effect control command reception buffer and confirms the contents, thereby receiving the received effect control command. A control command can be specified.

  When it is determined in step S501 that the first start opening prize designation command has been received (step S501; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data in the first starting opening prize designation command, the first start opening prize designation command is executed. However, it is determined whether or not it is a first winning determination result notification command for notifying that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the non-reach variation pattern common range (step S502). At this time, if it is the first winning determination result notification command (step S502; Yes), for example, 1 is added to the value of the first variation number counter (first variation number count value) provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Thus, the update is performed (step S503).

  After executing the process of step S503, the display update setting corresponding to the first start opening prize is set (step S504), and the start winning command process is terminated. For example, in the process of step S504, the first one based on the detection of a game ball that has entered one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H into the first start winning opening (start winning prize). Display setting for changing to a green circular display is performed in accordance with the establishment of the start condition.

  When it is determined in step S502 that the first start opening winning designation command is not the first winning determination result notification command (step S502; No), the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is common to the super variation pattern. It is determined whether or not it is a second winning determination result notification command for notifying that it is within the range (step S505).

  If it is determined in step S505 that it is the second winning determination result notification command (step S505; Yes), whether or not there is a variable display result other than “non-reach” in the hold storage. That is, it is determined whether there is a pending storage corresponding to receiving a command other than the first prize determination result notification command or the fifth prize determination result notification command (step S506). If there is no variable display result other than “non-reach” in the hold storage (step S506; No), it is determined whether or not the first variation count value is “0” (step S507). If there is a variable display result other than “non-reach” in the pending storage (step S506; Yes), or if the first variation count value is “0” (step S507; Yes), this will be described later. The process proceeds to step S511.

  If it is determined in step S507 that the first variation count value is other than “0” (step S507; No), for example, the value of the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 (continuous) “1” is set to the production start condition establishment buffer value (step S508), and after updating by adding 1 to the first variation count value (step S509), the continuous production start setting process is executed (step S509). Step S510).

  When it is determined in step S507 that the second variation count value is “0” (step S507; Yes), after executing the process of step S510, the display update corresponding to the first start opening prize is performed. After the setting is made (step S511), the start winning command processing is terminated. For example, in the process of step S511, the first by detecting a game ball that has entered one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H into the first start winning opening (start winning prize). In accordance with the establishment of the start condition, display setting is performed to change one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H to a green star display.

  When it is determined in step S505 that it is not the second winning determination result notification command (step S505; No), the random display value MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small”. It is determined whether or not it is a third winning determination result notification command for notifying that it matches a determined value such as “win”, which is “win” (step S512).

  If it is determined in step S512 that it is the third winning determination result notification command (step S512; Yes), whether or not there is a variable display result other than “non-reach” in the hold storage. That is, it is determined whether there is a pending storage corresponding to receiving a command other than the first winning determination result notification command or the fifth winning determination result notification command (step S513). If there is no variable display result other than “non-reach” in the hold storage (step S513; No), it is determined whether or not the first variation count value is “0” (step S514). If there is a variable display result other than “non-reach” in the pending storage (step S513; Yes), or if the first variation count value is “0” (step S514; Yes), this will be described later. The process proceeds to step S518.

  When it is determined in step S514 that the first variation count value is other than “0” (step S514; No), “2” is set to the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer value (step S515). After updating by adding 1 to the first variation count value (step S516), continuous effect start setting processing is executed (step S517).

  When it is determined in step S514 that the second variation count value is “0” (step S514; Yes), after executing the process of step S517, the display update corresponding to the first start opening prize is performed. After the setting is made (step S518), the command process at the start winning prize is ended. For example, in the process of step S518, one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H is detected by detecting the game ball that has entered (start winning) the first start winning opening. A display setting for changing to a green star display is performed in accordance with the establishment of the start condition.

  If it is determined in step S512 that it is not the third winning determination result notification command (step S512; No), that is, if it is the fourth winning determination result notification command, the first variation count value is set to “ It is initialized to “0” (step S519). Thus, when the fourth winning determination result notification command is received, the continuous effect is not executed.

  After executing the process of step S519, the display update setting corresponding to the first start opening prize is set (step S521), and the start winning command process is terminated. For example, in the process of step S521, the first by detecting a game ball that has entered one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H into the first start winning opening (start winning prize). Display setting for changing to a green circular display is performed in accordance with the establishment of the start condition.

  When it is determined in step S501 that the first start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S501; No), it is determined whether or not the second starting opening winning designation command has been received (step S522 in FIG. 31). ). At this time, if the second start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S522; No), the start winning command processing is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S522 that the second start opening prize designation command has been received (step S522; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data in the second start opening prize designation command, the second start opening prize designation command is performed. However, it is determined whether or not it is the fifth winning determination result notification command for notifying that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the non-reach variation pattern common range (step S523). At this time, if it is the fifth winning determination result notification command (step S523; Yes), for example, it is updated by adding 1 to the second variation count value provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S524). ).

  After the processing of step S524 is executed, display update setting corresponding to the second start opening winning is performed (step S525), and the start winning command processing is ended. For example, in the process of step S525, a second one is detected by detecting a game ball that has entered one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H into the second start winning opening (start winning prize). Display setting for changing to a blue circular display is performed according to the establishment of the start condition.

  If it is determined in step S523 that the second start opening winning designation command is not the fifth winning determination result notification command (step S523; No), the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is common to the super variation pattern. It is determined whether it is a sixth winning determination result notification command for notifying that it is within the range (step S526).

  If it is determined in step S526 that it is the sixth winning determination result notification command (step S526; Yes), whether or not there is a variable display result other than “non-reach” in the hold storage. That is, it is determined whether or not there is a pending storage corresponding to receiving a command other than the first winning determination result notification command or the fifth winning determination result notification command (step S526A). If there is no variable display result other than “non-reach” in the hold storage (step S526A; No), it is determined whether or not the second variation count value is “0” (step S527).

  When it is determined in step S527 that the second variation count value is other than “0” (step S527; No), “3” is set to the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer value (step S528). Then, after updating by adding 1 to the second variation count value (step S529), continuous effect start setting processing is executed (step S530).

  When it is determined in step S526A that there is a variable display result other than “non-reach” in the stored storage (step S526A; Yes), the second variation count value is “0” in step S527. When it is determined that there is (Step S527; Yes), after executing the processing of Step S530, the display update setting corresponding to the second start opening winning is set (Step S531), and then the start winning command processing is performed. Exit. For example, in the process of step S531, the second by detecting a game ball that has entered one of the display parts not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H into the second start winning opening (start winning prize). Display setting for changing to a blue star display is performed according to the establishment of the start condition.

  If it is determined in step S526 that the command is not the sixth winning determination result notification command (step S526; No), the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small”. It is determined whether or not it is a seventh winning determination result notification command for notifying that the determination value is “win”, such as “win” (step S532).

  If it is determined in step S532 that it is the seventh winning determination result notification command (step S532; Yes), whether or not there is a variable display result other than “non-reach” in the hold storage. That is, it is determined whether or not there is a pending storage corresponding to receiving a command other than the first winning determination result notification command or the fifth winning determination result notification command (step S532A). If there is no variable display result other than “non-reach” in the hold storage (step S532A; No), it is determined whether or not the second variation count value is “0” (step S533).

  If it is determined in step S533 that the second variation count value is other than “0” (step S533; No), “4” is set as the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer value (step S534). Then, after updating by adding 1 to the first variation count value, the continuous effect start setting process is executed (step S536).

  When it is determined in step S532A that there is a variable display result other than “non-reach” in the stored storage (step S532A; Yes), the second variation count value is “0” in step S533. When it is determined that there is (Step S533; Yes), after executing the process of Step S536, the display update setting corresponding to the second start opening winning is set (Step S537), and the start winning command processing is performed. Exit. For example, in the process of step S537, the second by detecting a game ball that has entered one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H into the second start winning opening (start winning prize). Display setting for changing to a blue star display is performed in accordance with the establishment of the start condition.

  When it is determined in step S532 that the command is not a seventh winning determination result notification command (step S532; No), the second variation count value is initialized to “0” (step S539).

  After executing the process of step S539, the display update setting corresponding to the first start opening prize is set (step S540), and the start winning command process is terminated. For example, in the process of step S540, a second one based on the detection of a game ball that has entered one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H into the second start winning opening (start winning prize). Display setting for changing to a blue circular display is performed according to the establishment of the start condition.

  32 and 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the continuous effect start setting process executed in steps S510 and S518 in FIG. 30 and steps S530 and S536 in FIG. In the continuous effect start setting process shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first continuous effect in-progress flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is turned on ( Step S701 in FIG. Note that the first continuous production flag is set when the execution of the continuous production is started based on the fact that the continuous production start condition establishment buffer value is “1” or “2”, for example, the step shown in FIG. When it is set to the on state by the processing of S711 and the execution of the continuous effect is finished, for example, it is cleared and turned off by the processing of step S577 shown in FIG.

  When the first continuous effect flag is OFF in step S701 (step S701; No), it is determined whether or not the second continuous effect flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is ON (step S701: NO). Step S702). It should be noted that the second continuous effect flag is used when the execution of the continuous effect is started based on the fact that the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer value is “3” or “4”, for example, the step shown in FIG. When the on-state is set by the processing of S714 or the like and the execution of the continuous effect is finished, it is cleared and turned off by the processing of step S577 shown in FIG. 41, for example.

  When the second continuous production in-process flag is off in step S702 (step S702; No), the continuous production start determination table 160 is selected and set as a use table for determining whether or not to start the continuous production. (Step S704).

  Subsequent to the processing in step S704, numerical data indicating the random number SR1 for determining the continuous effect start is extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193, for example (step S705). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR1 extracted in step S705, by referring to the continuous effect start determination table 160 set in step S704, the continuous effect start corresponding to whether to start the continuous effect or not. The presence or absence is determined (step S706). At this time, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S706 is the start of a continuous effect for starting a continuous effect (step S707). If it is determined in step S707 that there is no continuous production start (step S707; No), the continuous production start setting process ends.

  When it is determined in step S707 that there is a continuous production start (step S707; Yes), it is determined whether or not the continuous production start condition establishment buffer value is “2” or less (step S708 in FIG. 33). At this time, if the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer value is equal to or less than “2” (step S708; Yes), the first variation count value is set as the initial count value in the continuous effect counter (step S709), and then the first The variable count value is set to “0” and initialized (step S710). Further, the first continuous production in-progress flag provided in the production control flag setting unit 191 is set to the on state (step S711). Note that the continuous effect is actually executed when the continuous effect count value is “4” or less, as shown in FIG. 16. Even if the continuous production count value is “5” or more, a continuous production pattern is provided in which the continuous production is executed, and the continuous production is also executed when the continuous production count value is “5” or more. You may make it do.

  If it is determined in step S708 that the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer value is larger than “2” (step S708; No), the second variation count value is set as the count initial value in the continuous effect counter. (Step S712), “0” is set to the second variation count value and initialization is performed (Step S713). Further, the second continuous production in-progress flag provided in the production control flag setting unit 191 is set to the on state (step S714).

  After the process of step S711 or S714 is executed, the continuous effect pattern determination table 161 is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of continuous effect patterns (step S715). Subsequently, for example, the numerical data indicating the random value SR2 for determining the continuous effect pattern is extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S716). Then, based on the continuous effect count initial value that is the count initial value in the continuous effect counter set in step S709 or S712 and the numerical data indicating the random value SR2 extracted in step S716, the continuous effect set in step S715. By referring to the effect pattern determination table 161, a plurality of types of continuous effect patterns RP1-1 to continuous effect patterns RP1-3, continuous effect patterns RP2-1 to continuous effect patterns RP2-3, continuous effect patterns RP3-1 to continuous. Of the effect pattern RP3-3 and the continuous effect pattern RP4-1 to the continuous effect pattern RP4-3, the current use pattern is determined (step S717). At this time, for example, continuous effect pattern RP1-1 to continuous effect pattern RP1-3, continuous effect pattern RP2-1 to continuous effect pattern RP2-3, continuous effect pattern RP3-1 to continuous effect pattern RP3-3, continuous effect pattern RP4. -1-Determination of the continuous effect pattern in step S717 by storing data indicating an identification number or the like that can identify any of the continuous effect patterns RP4-3 in the continuous effect pattern buffer included in the effect control buffer 194. The result is stored (step S718).

  After executing the process of step S718, the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer value is initialized to “0” (step S719), and then the continuous effect start setting process ends.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S406 of FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 34, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a start winning memory display process (step S159). In this start winning memory display process, the display settings performed in steps S504, S511, S518, and S521 in FIG. 30, the steps S525, S531, S537, and S540 in FIG. 31 and the determination in step S717 in FIG. Processing for performing display control in the start winning storage display area 5H is included according to the continuous effect pattern and the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (continuous effect count value).

  For example, when both the first continuous effect flag and the second continuous effect flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 are OFF, the process proceeds to steps S504 and S521 in FIG. 30 and steps S525 and S540 in FIG. In accordance with the display settings made in this way, one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H is changed to a circular display. On the other hand, when either the first continuous effect flag or the second continuous effect flag is on, it was performed in steps S511 and S518 in FIG. 30 or steps S531 and S537 in FIG. In accordance with the display setting, the continuous effect pattern and the continuous effect count value determined in step S717 of FIG. 33, the display is deformed and displayed in a shape corresponding to the continuous effect pattern and the continuous effect count value.

  Here, when the continuous effect pattern RP4-3 is determined in step S717 in FIG. 33 and the continuous effect count value is “4”, steps S511 and S518 in FIG. 30 and step S531 in FIG. In accordance with the display setting performed in S537, one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H is changed to a star display. Next, when the continuous effect count value is “3”, the display part changed to the star display is returned to non-display, and one of the circular display parts different from the display part returned to non-display is displayed. The shape of the display part (for example, the display part adjacent to the left side of the display part that has returned to non-display) is deformed and displayed in a star shape. Subsequently, when the continuous effect count value becomes “2”, the display part deformed and displayed in a star shape is returned to non-display, and one of the circular display parts different from the display part returned to non-display is displayed. The shape of the display part (for example, the display part adjacent to the left side of the display part that has returned to non-display) is deformed and displayed in a star shape. Further, when the continuous effect count value is “1”, the display part deformed and displayed in a star shape is returned to non-display and one of the circular display parts different from the display part returned to non-display ( For example, the shape of the display part on the left side of the display part that has returned to non-display is deformed and displayed in a star shape. When the continuous effect count value becomes “0”, the display part deformed and displayed in a star shape is returned to non-display, and all the display parts in the start winning memory display area 5H are hidden.

  One of the circular display parts different from the display part returned to non-display (for example, the display part that has returned to non-display) In the control of deforming and displaying the shape of the display part on the left side of the display to a star shape or the like (shifting the display of the star shape or the like), for example, a hold subtraction command is transmitted from the main board 11 when the variable display ends. Thus, when the hold subtraction command is received on the side of the effect control board 12, the hold subtraction flag is set to the on state. If the hold subtraction flag is on in step S159, the display such as a star is shifted at that timing. Thereafter, the pending subtraction flag is cleared to the off state.

  After executing the start winning memory display process in step S159, the CPU 120 for effect control, for example, in accordance with the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191, the following processes in steps S160 to S166 are performed. Select one of them and execute it.

  The decorative symbol variation start waiting process in step S160 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In the decorative symbol variation start waiting process, the image display device 5 depends on whether one of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is received as the variation start command transmitted from the main board 11. Includes a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. . At this time, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” in response to the determination to start variable display.

  The decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. In order to perform various performance operations including variable display of decorative symbols, the final decorative symbol, temporary stop symbol, warning pattern, etc., depending on the variation pattern and variable display result, etc. The process to determine is included. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation setting process, there is a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the processing of updating the effect image in the continuous effect and the special symbol game using the second special symbol in which the variable display result is “losing”. Based on the start, a process for performing a setting for interrupting the continuous effect, and a variable display of decorative symbols is started corresponding to the special game using the first special figure during the interruption of the continuous effect Decorative design corresponding to the special game using the second special figure in which the setting for resuming the continuous production based on the game, and the variable display result is “hit” such as “big hit” or “small hit” In addition, a process for making a setting for ending the continuous production based on the start of the variable display is included. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, various effect control patterns such as a symbol variation control pattern and a notice effect control pattern are set based on these determination results. After such determination and setting are performed, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The decorative symbol variation process in step S162 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the decorative symbol variation processing, various types of symbol variation control patterns, warning effect control patterns, and the like corresponding to the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 are used. Processing for reading out the control data and performing various effects control during variable display of the decorative design is included. After performing such effect control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the symbol variation control pattern, or when a decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Correspondingly, the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed completely stopped. If the final decorative design is displayed in response to the end code being read from the design variation control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. In addition, even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative pattern on the production control board 12 side. When the confirmed decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The decorative symbol variation end process in step S163 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The decorative symbol variation end process includes a process of determining whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. At this time, if it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, the value of the effect process flag is set to “4” when the special figure display result specified from the hit start designation command is “big hit”. On the other hand, when the special figure display result is “small hit”, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the hit start designation command, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the variable display result being “lost”.

  The big hit control effect process in step S164 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the big hit control effect processing, for example, a hit effect control pattern corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” or the like is set, and an effect image based on the set contents is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Display the sound, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and game effect is output by outputting a command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14 Processing for controlling various performance operations in the big hit gaming state such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the lamp 9 and the decoration LED is included. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The effect process during small hit control in step S165 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hitting control effect process, for example, a hit effect control pattern corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “small hit” or the like is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the image display device 5. By displaying on the display screen, outputting sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound output board 13, and outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 Processing for controlling various effect operations in the small hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, is included. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process in step S166 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this ending effect process, a hit effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 is output by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. And a process for controlling various effect operations corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the decoration LED. Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” in response to the completion of such production operation.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation setting process executed in step S161 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation setting process shown in FIG. 35, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a continuous effect setting process (step S551). FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the continuous effect setting process executed in step S551. In the setting process during continuous production shown in FIG. 36, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the production interruption flag is on (step S731). The production interruption flag is based on the reception of the second variation start command for designating that the variable display result is “lost” when the first continuous production flag is on, for example, step S736. When the first variation start command is received after that, for example, in step S738, it is cleared and turned off.

  When it is determined in step S731 that the production interruption flag is off (step S731; No), it is determined whether or not the first continuous production flag is on (step S732). At this time, if the first continuous effect flag is on (step S732; Yes), it is determined whether a second variation start command is received from the main board 11 (step S733).

  When it is determined in step S733 that the second variation start command has been received (step S733; Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display result specified by the second variation start command is “lost” (step S733). S734). At this time, if the variable display result is not “losing” (step S734; No), a setting for ending the continuous effect is performed (step S735). For example, in the process of step S735, the continuous effect pattern buffer is cleared to delete the storage of the continuous effect pattern, and the continuous effect number counter is cleared to initialize the continuous effect count value to “0”. In response to the end of the continuous effect, the first continuous effect flag may be cleared and set to the off state.

  When it is determined in step S734 that the variable display result is “losing” (step S734; Yes), the production interruption flag is set to the on state (step S736), and the continuous production setting process is terminated. .

  When it is determined in step S731 that the effect suspension flag is on (step S731; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first variation start command is received from the main board 11 (step S737). At this time, if the first variation start command has not been received (step S737; No), the setting process during continuous production is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S737 that the first change start command has been received (step S737; Yes), the production interruption flag is cleared and turned off (step S738), and then the continuous production setting process is terminated.

  After executing the setting process during continuous production as described above in step S551 in FIG. 35, the final stop symbol determination process is executed (step S552). FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the final stop symbol determination process executed in step S552. In the final stop symbol determination process shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and the special figure display result is “lost”. It is determined whether or not (step S751). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” (step S751; Yes), it is designated by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to a case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” (step S752).

  If it is determined in step S752 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S752; Yes), after determining the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination (step S753), The final stop symbol determination process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step S753, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table, the left determined symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L on the display screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. Next, a predetermined right determined symbol determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating a random number for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. , Etc., the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, it is preferable to determine the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the middle fixed decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the display screen of the image display device 5 are determined among the fixed decorative symbols.

  If it is determined in step S752 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S752; No), a final decorative symbol combination that is a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S754), and the final The stop symbol determination process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step S754, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a left / right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to the predetermined left / right determined symbol determination table, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together. The decorative symbol with the same symbol number is determined. Further, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to this, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C on the display screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S751 that the special figure display result is not “lost” (step S751; No), the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the special figure display It is determined whether the result is “small hit” or other cases (step S755). At this time, if it is determined that the big hit type is “surprise” or the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S755; Yes), the big hit type such as one of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 is “ After determining the combination of the determined decorative symbols that will be the variable display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the case of “Accuracy” or the special symbol display result of “Small hit” (step S756), the final stop symbol determining process is terminated. . As an example, corresponding to the case where any one of the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the final stop symbols constituting any of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 and The combination of the determined decorative design is determined. In this case, a predetermined chance index determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random numbers for chance index determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. It is sufficient to determine a combination of definite decorative symbols constituting any one of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 by referring to the above. Further, when any one of the fluctuation pattern PC1-4 and the fluctuation pattern PC1-5 is designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, for example, by executing the same processing as in step S754, the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination are performed. What is necessary is just to determine the combination of the definite design which becomes.

  When it is determined in step S755 that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change” other than “probability” (step S755; No), the final stop constituting the big hit combination After determining the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the symbols (step S757), the final stop symbol determining process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step S757, first, numerical data indicating a random number for determining the big hit fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. Stop by aligning with the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5 by referring to the stored predetermined jackpot fixed symbol determination table. A decorative symbol having the same symbol number is determined.

  After the final stop symbol determination process as described above is executed in step S552 of FIG. 35, a variable display effect setting process is executed (step S553). FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display effect setting process executed in step S514. In the variable display effect setting process shown in FIG. 38, the effect control CPU 120 first performs “slip” according to the change pattern specified by reading the EXT data in the change pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example. It is determined whether or not it is “with slip” that executes the variable display effect of “” (step S771).

  If it is determined in step S771 that there is “slip” (step S771; Yes), a decorative symbol to be a temporary stop symbol before slip that is temporarily stopped in the variable display effect of “slip” is determined (step S772). As an example, in the process of step S772, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the pre-slip temporary stop symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. The decorative symbol that becomes the temporary stop symbol before slip may be determined by referring to a predetermined pre-slip temporary stop symbol determination table.

  When it is determined in step S771 that there is no “slip” (step S771; No), after executing the process of step S772, for example, the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is read. It is determined whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed according to the specified variation pattern (step S773). At this time, if it is determined that there is “pseudo-continuous” (step S773; Yes), the decoration that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” and constitutes one of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8. A symbol is determined (step S774). As an example, in the process of step S774, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a pseudo-continuous chance updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined pseudo-continuous chance determination table or the like, a temporary stop display is performed every time a pseudo-continuous change (re-variation) is executed, and a decorative pattern constituting any of the pseudo-continuous chance eyes GC1 to GC8 is determined. do it.

  When it is determined in step S773 that “there is no pseudo-continuity” (step S773; No), the variable display effect setting process is ended as it is.

  After performing the variable display effect setting process as described above in step S553 of FIG. 35, the notice effect setting process is executed (step S554). For example, in the notice effect setting process, it is determined whether or not a notice effect is to be executed, and when it is executed, which one of a plurality of kinds of notice effects is to be executed, such as “character notice” or “operation notice”. Is done. In addition, processing for determining a notice pattern as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance is performed in accordance with the kind of notice effect (notice effect type).

  Following the notice effect setting process in step S554, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S555). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared symbol variation control patterns corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, and sets it as a usage pattern. In addition, in response to the continuous production pattern or the continuous production count value determined in the continuous production start setting process of FIG. 32 and FIG. set. If the production interruption flag is on, the set of continuous production control patterns only needs to be skipped, and the continuous production control pattern set is skipped in this way, thereby reducing the processing by the program. be able to. Furthermore, in response to the notice pattern determined in the notice effect setting process in step S554, one of a plurality of prepared notice effect control patterns is selected and set as a use pattern.

  Following the processing of step S555, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command (step S556). And the setting for starting the fluctuation | variation of the decoration design in the image display apparatus 5 is performed (step S557). At this time, for example, the display control command designated by the display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S555 is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the display screen 5. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation process (step S558), and the decorative symbol variation setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation process executed in step S162 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation process shown in FIG. 39, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the effect suspension flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S560). At this time, if the production interruption flag is off (step S560; Yes), continuous production execution processing is performed (step S561).

  If it is determined in step S560 that the flag indicating that the production is interrupted is ON (step S560; Yes), or after the continuous production execution process is executed in step S561, the production control process timer value is updated (for example, 1 subtraction). ) (Step S562), the updated effect control process timer value is compared with the effect control process timer determination value indicated by the effect control pattern, and it is determined whether or not it matches any of the timer determination values. Is performed (step S563). And if it does not correspond to any timer determination value (step S563; No), the decorative symbol changing process is terminated.

  If the timer determination value matches with the timer determination value in step S563 (step S563; Yes), the effect control execution data (for example, display control data, voice control data, etc.) stored in the effect control pattern in association with the timer determination value. The lamp control data, a part or all of the operation detection control data) or the end code is read (step S564). Here, when the plurality of timer determination values indicated by the effect control pattern in the process of step S563 match the effect control process timer value, the plurality of stored timer determination values are associated with each other and stored. The effect control execution data may be read out in the process of step S564. In step S564, it is determined whether an end code has been read (step S565). At this time, if it is determined that it is not an end code (step S565; No), after performing the effect operation control according to the effect control execution data read in step S564 (step S566), the decorative symbol variation End the middle process.

  For example, in the rendering operation control by the process of step S566, a display control command designated by the display control data is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, and a command corresponding to the sound number data designated by the voice control data is issued. Of the transmission to the sound control board 13 and the output of the signal specified by the lamp control data to the lamp control board 14, a part or all of them may be performed sequentially or in parallel (if only one operation is performed). If done alone). In addition, in the effect operation control by the process of step S566, whether or not it is an operation effective period for effectively detecting the operation action of the player or the like on the operation unit 30 based on the operation detection control data read in step S564. Determine. At this time, if the operation is valid, it is determined based on the detection signal transmitted from the operation detection switch 31 whether or not the player's operation on the operation unit 30 has been detected. And when operation with respect to the operation part 30 is not detected but an operation valid period is complete | finished, presentation operation control according to operation detection control data is complete | finished. On the other hand, when an operation on the operation unit 30 is detected within the operation effective period, the operation on the operation unit 30 is performed, for example, by changing to an effect control pattern designated by the operation detection control data. It is only necessary to perform control or setting for changing the rendering operation in response to the above.

  If it is determined in step S565 that it is an end code (step S565; Yes), for example, by setting a predetermined timer initial value in the effect control process timer, the hit start designation command reception waiting time is set. This is performed (step S567). Then, after updating the value of the effect process flag to “3” which is a value corresponding to the process at the end of decoration symbol variation (step S568), the process during decoration symbol variation is terminated.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the continuous effect execution process executed in step S561 of FIG. In the continuous effect execution process shown in FIG. 40, the effect control CPU 120 first performs a continuous effect in which the continuous effect pattern set in the continuous effect pattern buffer included in the effect control buffer 194 uses the operation button 32. It is determined whether or not it is a continuous effect pattern of RP2-3 (step S591).

  If it is a continuous effect pattern of RP2-1 to RP2-3 (step S591; Yes), an effect image such as a message image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 (for example, “Press the button to defeat 100 people” is displayed. After that, “100 people” is displayed), and a lamp built in the operation button 32 is turned on to execute a button operation promotion effect for encouraging the player to operate the operation button 32 (step S592). At this time, in the second and subsequent continuous performances, the number decreased until the previous time is read and the number of persons corresponding to the number is displayed.

  After executing the button operation promotion effect, it is determined whether or not an operation of the operation button 32 by the player has been detected by the operation detection switch 31 (step S593). When the operation of the operation button 32 is detected (step S593; Yes), the number display on the display screen of the image display device 5 is decreased by 5 (step S594).

  When the operation of the operation button 32 is not detected in step S593 (step S; No), or after step S594, it is determined whether the operation valid period has ended (step S595). If the operation valid period has not ended (step S595; No), the continuous effect execution process ends. If the operation valid period has ended (step S595; Yes), the display of the number of people for the effect on the display screen of the image display device 5 is erased, and a message image (for example, “End”) indicating that the effect has ended is displayed. An effect end display such as display is performed (step S596). At this time, the number decreased in the process of step S594 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step S597). Note that the number of people displayed on the image display device 5 is also stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. For example, “100 people” is stored, and the number decreased according to the operation of the operation button 32 (“95 people” → “90 people”, etc.) is stored as needed. After the process of step S597, the continuous effect execution process is finished.

  When it is determined in step S598 that it is not the continuous effect pattern of RP2-1 to RP2-3 (step S598; No), the continuous effect pattern of RP4-1 to RP4-3 that performs the continuous effect using the operation buttons 32 is performed. It is determined whether or not it is a continuous effect pattern (step S598).

  If the effect pattern is a continuous effect pattern of RP4-1 to RP4-3 (step S598; Yes), an effect image such as a message image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 (for example, as in step S592, the “100 button is pressed to select 100 (“Defeat” is displayed and then “100 people” is displayed), and a lamp built in the operation button 32 is turned on to execute a button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to perform an operation action on the operation button 32 ( Step S599). At this time, in the second and subsequent continuous performances, the number decreased until the previous time is read and the number of persons corresponding to the number is displayed.

  After the button operation promotion effect is executed, it is determined whether or not an operation of the operation button 32 by the player is detected by the operation detection switch 31 (step S600). When the operation of the operation button 32 is detected (step S600; Yes), the number display on the display screen of the image display device 5 is decreased by 10 (step S601).

  When the operation of the operation button 32 is not detected in step S600 (step S; No), or after step S601, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period has ended (step S602). If the operation valid period has not ended (step S602; No), the continuous effect execution process ends. If the operation valid period has ended (step S602; Yes), the display of the number of people for the effect on the display screen of the image display device 5 is erased, and a message image (for example, “End”) indicating that the effect has ended is displayed. An effect end display such as display is performed (step S603). At this time, the number decreased in the process of step S601 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step S604). After the process of step S604, the continuous effect execution process ends.

  Note that the number to be decreased in steps S594 and S601 has a predetermined limit corresponding to the continuous effect count value in order to prevent the number of people display from becoming 0 in the middle of the continuous effect. For example, when the continuous effect count value is “3”, the limit is up to 80 people, and when it is “2”, the limit is 50 people, and no further decrease is made even when the operation of the operation button 32 is detected. Various numbers may be set as the limit number. In that case, the lower limit is set when the continuous production start condition buffer value is “2” or “4” than when the continuous production start condition buffer value is “1” or “3”. May be easier. By doing in this way, a player comes to pay more attention to continuous production. When the continuous production count value is “1”, if the continuous production start condition buffer value is “2” or “4”, the continuous production start condition buffer value is decreased to 0, and the continuous production start condition buffer value is “1” or If it is “3”, do not decrease from 10 people. In this way, when the number of people display becomes zero, it can be notified that the variable display result will be “big hit”. It should be noted that even if the continuous effect start condition buffer value is “2” or “4”, the number of people display may be zero only at a predetermined rate.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation end process executed in step S163 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation end process shown in FIG. 41, the effect control CPU 120 first displays the final decorative symbol, which is the final stop symbol, as a complete stop display and displays it (step S571). When a decorative symbol stop command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the decorative symbol display areas “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed until the decorative symbol stop command is received. What is necessary is just to carry out temporary stop display so that the fluctuation variation display of a decorative design, for example may be performed in 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  Following the processing of step S571, it is determined whether or not the first continuous rendering flag provided in the rendering control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S572). At this time, if the first continuous effect flag is off (step S572; No), it is determined whether or not the second continuous effect flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S573). ).

  If it is determined in step S572 that the first continuous effect flag is on (step S572; Yes), or if it is determined in step S573 that the second continuous effect flag is on (step S573; Yes), it is determined whether or not the production interruption flag provided in the production control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S574). At this time, if the production interruption flag is off (step S574; No), after the continuous production count value is updated by subtracting 1 (step S575), the updated continuous production count value is “0”. It is determined whether or not there is (step S576).

  At this time, if the continuous effect count value is “0” (step S576; Yes), a setting for ending the continuous effect is performed (step S577). For example, in the process of step S577, the continuous effect pattern buffer is cleared and the storage of the continuous effect pattern is deleted. Further, in response to the end of the continuous effect, the first continuous effect flag or the second continuous effect flag may be cleared to be in the off state.

  When the continuous effect count value is other than “0” in step S576 (step S576; No), after executing the process of step S577, for example, it is determined whether or not a hit start designation command is received, When it is received, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” by reading the EXT data of the hit start designation command (step S578). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S578; Yes), the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” corresponding to the effect processing during the big hit control. (Step S579), the decorative symbol variation end process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S578 that the special figure display result is not “big hit” (step S578; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S580). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S580; Yes), the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” which is a value corresponding to the effect process during the small hit control. (Step S581), the decorative symbol variation end processing is terminated. When it is determined in step S580 that the special figure display result is not “small hit” (step S580; No), the value of the effect process flag is initialized to “0” (step S582), and the decoration symbol variation ends. End time processing.

  When the second continuous production flag is off at step S573 (step S573; No) or when the production interruption flag is on at step S574 (step S574; Yes), the first variation count value is set. It is determined whether or not it is “0” (step S583). If the first variation count value is “0” (step S583; Yes), it is determined whether or not the second variation count value is “0” (step S584). If the first variation count value or the second variation count value is other than “0” (step S583 or S584; No), it is determined whether the current variation corresponds to the variation of the first special figure. (Step S585). For example, a reserved storage unit is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is updated every time a first start opening prize designation command is received or a second start opening prize designation command is received. And remember. In step S585, it is determined whether or not the current change corresponds to the change in the first special figure by checking the reserved storage unit. If the current fluctuation corresponds to the fluctuation of the first special figure, the first reserved memory number in the holding memory unit is subtracted by 1, and if the current fluctuation does not correspond to the fluctuation of the first special figure, The second reserved memory number in the reserved memory unit is updated by one.

  When it is determined in step S585 that the current variation corresponds to the first special figure (step S585; Yes), the first variation count value is updated by 1 (step S586). If it is determined in step S585 that the current variation corresponds to the second special figure (step S585; No), the second variation count value is updated by 1 (step S587).

  When the second variation count value is “0” in step S584 (step S54; Yes), when the process of step S586 or S587 is completed, the process proceeds to step S578. Note that the process of updating the first variation count value or the second variation count value in steps S583 to S587 is executed at the start of decoration symbol variation (for example, in the ornament symbol variation setting process in step S161). Also good.

  Next, specific examples of various effects performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball that has entered (start winning) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A, or the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is formed. When a game ball that has entered (start winning prize) is detected by the second start opening switch 22B, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted in step S209 of FIG. Based on this, a winning specific pattern determination process is executed in step S211. When it is determined in step S353 in FIG. 22 that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the non-reach variation pattern common range (step S353; Yes), Based on the transmission setting in step S355, a first winning determination result notification command for notifying that the random value MR3 is within the non-reach fluctuation pattern common range is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Is done. Further, at the time of the second start winning, a fifth winning determination result notification command for notifying that the random value MR3 is within the non-reach fluctuation pattern common range based on the transmission setting in step S356 is sent from the main board 11. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S357 that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the super-reach variation pattern common range (step S357; Yes), based on the transmission setting in step S359, A second winning determination result notification command for notifying that the random value MR3 is within the common range of the super reach variation pattern is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S352 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (step S352; No), the variable display result at the time of the first start winning is based on the transmission setting in step S365 of FIG. A third prize determination result notification command for notifying that “winning” such as “big hit” or “small win” is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  In the effect control board 12, after it is determined in step S501 in FIG. 30 that the first start opening winning designation command is received, in step S502, the first starting opening winning designation command is a first winning determination result notification command. If it is determined that there is one (step S502; Yes), it is updated by adding 1 to the first variation count value in step S503. On the other hand, after it is determined in step S522 in FIG. 31 that the second start opening prize designation command has been received, the second start opening prize designation command is a fifth winning determination result notification command in step S523. (Step S523; Yes), it is updated by adding 1 to the second variation count value in step S524.

  In addition, when it is determined in step S501 that the first start opening prize designation command has been received, and in step S505, it is determined that the first start opening prize designation command is the second winning determination result notification command. (Step S505; Yes) When it is determined that the first variation count value is other than “0”, “1” is set to the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer value in Step S508. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S512 that the first start opening winning designation command is the third winning determination result notification command (step S512; Yes), the first variation count value is “0”. If it is determined that it is other than “2”, “2” is set to the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer value in step S515.

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 42A, in response to the first reserved memory number being “3”, “3” is set as the first variation count value, and the image display device When the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the display screen 5, the first start port switch 22A A second winning determination result notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 to notify that the game ball that has won the start is detected and is within the common range of the super reach variation pattern. To do.

  In the effect control board 12, it is determined that the first start opening winning designation command is received in step S501 in FIG. 30 (step S501; Yes), and the second winning determination result notification command is received in step S505. Based on the determination (step S505; Yes), the determination that the first variation count value is “3” in step S507 (step S507; No), the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer in step S508. The value is set to “1”, and is updated to “4” by adding 1 to the first variation count value “3” in step S509.

  Thereafter, in step S510, a setting for starting a continuous effect is performed. Specifically, it is determined in step S701 in FIG. 32 that the first continuous effect flag is off (step S701; No), and in step S702, the second continuous effect flag is determined to be off. Based on this (step S702; No), the continuous effect start determination table 160 is referred to determine whether to start the continuous effect (steps S704 to S706). Here, since the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer value is “1”, the decision to start the continuous effect is made at a lower rate than when “2”.

  Here, when it is determined to start the continuous effect (step S707; Yes), it is determined in step S708 of FIG. 33 that the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer value is “1” (step S708; Yes). After the first variation count value “4” is set in the continuous effect counter as the initial count value in step S709, the first continuous effect flag is set in the on state in step S711. Thereafter, by referring to the continuous production pattern determination table 161, the continuous production pattern RP1-1 to the continuous production pattern RP1-3, the continuous production pattern RP2-1 to the continuous production pattern RP2-3, and the continuous production pattern RP3-1 to RP3-1. Any of the continuous effect pattern RP3-3 and the continuous effect pattern RP4-1 to the continuous effect pattern RP4-3 is determined as the usage pattern (steps S715 to S717). Here, it is assumed that the continuous performance patterns RP1-3 are determined as the usage patterns.

  Also, at this time, in step S511 of FIG. 30, one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H enters the first start winning opening (start winning prize). The display setting for changing to the green star display is performed according to the establishment of the first start condition by the detection of. In the start winning memory display process of step S159 shown in FIG. 34, the continuous effect pattern RP1-3 is determined in step S717 of FIG. 33, and the continuous effect count value is “4”. According to the display setting performed in step S511 of 30, for example, as shown in FIG. 42B, one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H is a green star shape. Change to display.

  Thereafter, when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R ends, it is determined in step S574 in FIG. 41 that the effect suspension flag is off. Based on this (step S574; No), the continuous effect count value is decremented by 1 in step S575, thereby being updated to “3”. When the first start condition is satisfied, in the start winning memory display process of step S159 shown in FIG. 34, the continuous effect pattern RP1-3 is determined in step S717 of FIG. 3 ”, the display part changed to the star display is returned to non-display, and for example, as shown in FIG. 42C, of the circular display parts different from the display part returned to non-display. The shape of one (for example, the display part on the left side of the display part that has returned to non-display) is deformed and displayed in a star shape.

  At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in response to the start of the variation of the special symbols in the special symbol game. In response to the reception of the first variation start command transmitted from the main substrate 11, the effect control substrate 12 starts variable display of decorative symbols based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. Settings are made. In step S555, the effect control board 12 selects one of a plurality of prepared symbol variation control patterns corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as a usage pattern. Corresponding to the continuous production pattern RP1-3, the continuous production count value “3”, etc., any one of a plurality of continuous production control patterns prepared is selected and set as a usage pattern.

  After that, the effect control CPU 120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 in step S518 shown in FIG. The decoration pattern is started to change in the display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After that, the image display device 5 displays and displays the final decorative symbol combination that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination, for example, as shown in FIG. finish.

  The effect control board 12 is updated by subtracting 1 from the continuous effect count value in step S575 of FIG. 41 every time the decorative symbol variable display is finished, and when the continuous effect count value becomes “2”. After the display part deformed and displayed in a star shape is returned to non-display, one of the circular display parts different from the display part returned to non-display (for example, to the left of the display part returned to non-display) The shape of the (display part) is deformed and displayed in a star shape, and the decorative symbols are changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After that, the image display device 5 displays and displays the final decorative symbol combination that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination, for example, as shown in FIG. finish.

  Then, when the continuous effect count value becomes “1”, after the display part deformed and displayed in a star shape is returned to non-display, for example, as shown in FIG. The shape of one of the different circular display parts (for example, the display part adjacent to the left of the display part that has returned to non-display) is deformed and displayed in a star shape, and “left”, “middle”, “right” Variations in the decorative symbols are executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After that, the image display device 5 displays the final decorative symbol combination that constitutes the non-reach combination as the final decorative symbol, for example, as shown in FIG. finish. At this time, in the decorative symbol variation end process of FIG. 41, a setting for ending the continuous effect is performed based on the determination that the continuous effect count value is “0” in step S576. .

  Thereafter, when the first start condition is satisfied, for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (H), the variation of the decorative symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Let me. Then, in the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 42 (I), the reach display is executed in which the variable display state of the decorative symbols is in the reach state and the reach mode is super reach. After that, the image display device 5 derives and displays the final decorative symbol combination that is the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination, for example, as shown in FIG. To do.

  As another example, as shown in FIG. 43A, in response to the first reserved storage number being “2”, “2” is set as the first variation count value, and the image When the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the display screen of the display device 5, the first start port switch 22A. The second winning prize determination result notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 to notify that the game ball that has won the start at is detected and within the common range of the super reach variation pattern. Shall.

  In the effect control board 12, it is determined that the first start opening winning designation command is received in step S501 in FIG. 30 (step S501; Yes), and the second winning determination result notification command is received in step S505. Based on the determination (step S505; Yes), the determination that the first variation count value is “2” in step S507 (step S507; No), the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer in step S508 The value is set to “1”, and is updated to “3” by adding 1 to the first variation count value “2” in step S509.

  Thereafter, in step S510, a setting for starting a continuous effect is performed. Specifically, it is determined in step S701 in FIG. 32 that the first continuous effect flag is off (step S701; No), and in step S702, the second continuous effect flag is determined to be off. Based on this (step S702; No), the continuous effect start determination table 160 is referred to determine whether to start the continuous effect (steps S704 to S706). Here, since the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer value is “1”, the decision to start the continuous effect is made at a lower rate than when “2”.

  Here, when it is determined to start the continuous effect (step S707; Yes), it is determined in step S708 of FIG. 33 that the continuous effect start condition establishment buffer value is “1” (step S708; Yes). In step S709, the first variation count value “3” is set as the initial count value in the continuous effect counter, and then in step S711, the first continuous effect flag is set to the on state. Thereafter, by referring to the continuous production pattern determination table 161, the continuous production pattern RP1-1 to the continuous production pattern RP1-3, the continuous production pattern RP2-1 to the continuous production pattern RP2-3, and the continuous production pattern RP3-1 to RP3-1. Any of the continuous effect pattern RP3-3 and the continuous effect pattern RP4-1 to the continuous effect pattern RP4-3 is determined as the usage pattern (steps S715 to S717). Here, it is assumed that the continuous performance pattern RP4-2 is determined as the usage pattern.

  Also, at this time, in step S511 of FIG. 30, one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H enters the first start winning opening (start winning prize). The display setting for changing to the green star display is performed according to the establishment of the first start condition by the detection of. In the start winning memory display process of step S159 shown in FIG. 34, the continuous effect pattern RP4-2 is determined in step S717 of FIG. 33 and the continuous effect count value is “3”. According to the display setting performed in step S511 of 30, for example, as shown in FIG. 43B, one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H is a green star shape. Change to display.

  Thereafter, when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R ends, it is determined in step S574 of FIG. 41 that the effect suspension flag is off. Based on the above (step S574; No), the continuous effect count value is decremented by 1 in step S575, thereby being updated to “2”. When the first start condition is satisfied, in the start winning memory display process of step S159 shown in FIG. 34, the continuous effect pattern RP4-2 is determined in step S717 of FIG. 2 ”, the display portion changed to the star display is returned to non-display and, for example, as shown in FIG. 43C, of the circular display portions different from the display portion returned to non-display. The shape of one (for example, the display part on the left side of the display part that has returned to non-display) is deformed and displayed in a star shape.

  At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in response to the start of the variation of the special symbols in the special symbol game. In response to the reception of the first variation start command transmitted from the main substrate 11, the effect control substrate 12 starts variable display of decorative symbols based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. Settings are made. In step S555, the effect control board 12 selects one of a plurality of prepared symbol variation control patterns corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as a usage pattern. Corresponding to the continuous effect pattern RP4-2, the continuous effect count value “2”, etc., one of a plurality of prepared continuous effect control patterns is selected and set as a use pattern.

During this variable display, it is determined Yes in step S598 of FIG. 40 in correspondence with the continuous production pattern RP4-2, and as shown in FIG.
A button operation promotion effect is executed (step S599). Here, a message image “Press the button to defeat 100 people!” Is displayed on the image display device 5. Thereafter, the characters “100 people” are displayed and the operation valid period starts.

  Here, when the pressing operation of the operation button 32 is detected (step S600; Yes), as shown in FIG. 43E, the number display of “100 people” is decreased by 10 (step S601), and “90” "People". Further, when a pressing operation of the operation button 32 is detected within the operation valid period (step S600; Yes), the number of persons displayed for “90 people” is decreased by 10 as shown in FIG. 43F (step S601). , “80 people”. Thus, based on the continuous operation with respect to the operation button 32 within the operation effective period, it is possible to execute a continuous effect that changes the effect mode stepwise.

  When the operation valid period ends (step S602; Yes), as shown in FIG. 43G, a message image “END” is displayed on the image display device 5 as an effect end display (step S603). At this time, the number decreased in the process of step S601 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step S604). In this example, it is remembered that the number has decreased from 100 to 20 and has reached 80.

  After that, the effect control CPU 120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 in step S518 shown in FIG. The variation of the decorative design is started in the display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After that, the image display device 5 displays and displays the confirmed decorative symbol combination that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination, for example, as shown in FIG. finish.

  When the continuous effect count value is “1”, the display part deformed and displayed in a star shape is returned to non-display, and then one of the circular display parts different from the display part returned to non-display ( For example, the shape of the display part on the left side of the display part that has returned to non-display is deformed and displayed in a star shape, and in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R The decoration pattern is changed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), a message image “Press the button to defeat 80 people!” Is displayed on the image display device 5 (step S599), which is the same as FIG. 43 (D) to (G). The continuous production is executed. In FIG. 44A, since it is stored in the process of step S604 that the number of people has decreased to 80 in the previous continuous performance, the continuous performance is continued from that number.

  When the variation time elapses after the execution of the continuous effect, the image display device 5 displays and displays the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination as shown in FIG. 44 (B), for example. As a result, the variable display of the decorative design is completed. At this time, in the decorative symbol variation end process of FIG. 41, a setting for ending the continuous effect is performed based on the determination that the continuous effect count value is “0” in step S576. .

  Thereafter, when the first start condition is satisfied, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), the variation of the decorative symbols is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Let Then, in the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 45 (A), the variable display state of the decorative symbols is in the reach state, and as shown in FIG. 45 (B), the reach effect in which the reach mode is super reach. Is executed. Thereafter, the display of the final decorative symbols constituting the reach combination is derived and displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 45C, for example, so that the variable display of the decorative symbols is completed. To do.

  In addition, the production aspect of the continuous production using the operation button 32 is not limited to this example, and various modifications are possible. For example, in this embodiment, the number of people decreased in accordance with the operation of the operation button 32 in the previous continuous performance is stored in the processing of steps S597 and S604, and the continuity is reflected reflecting the number of people decreased in the next continuous performance. Although the given continuous performance is executed, the same performance may be performed in each continuous performance. For example, in the continuous effect after executing the first continuous effect as shown in FIGS. 43D to 43G, as shown in FIG. The message image “Defeat!” May be displayed, and the same effect as the first continuous effect may be performed. It should be noted that it is possible to execute both a continuous effect with continuity and a continuous effect that performs the same effect every time, and the reliability that becomes a big hit may be varied depending on which is executed.

  Further, the continuous effect using the operation button 32 ends with the variable display immediately before the variable display for which the determination of executing the continuous effect is performed (ends at the time of FIG. 44B). As shown in FIG. 45D, the continuous effect may be executed even in the variable display that is the target of the determination that the continuous effect is executed. In the example of FIG. 45 (D), a message image “Press the button to defeat 60 people!” Is displayed in response to the decrease in the previous continuous performance to 60 people.

  In the above display example, every time the variable display is finished, the effect end display as shown in FIG. 43 (G) is performed and the continuous effect is once ended, but FIG. 43 (F) Later, as shown in FIGS. 46A to 46C, the variable display of the decorative symbols and the derivation display of the combination of the fixed decorative symbols are reduced and displayed in the lower right area of the image display device to display the effect end. Instead, a continuous effect may be executed over a plurality of variable displays.

  Subsequently, as a modified example during the big hit gaming state, a display example in the case where the continuous effect is executed based on the start winning in the big hit gaming state is shown. When the definite decorative symbol that is a big hit combination is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 47A, “big hit” is displayed on the image display device 5 and the big hit gaming state is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47B, “Round 1” is displayed to indicate that the first round has started. Here, it is determined in step S522 of FIG. 31 that the second start opening winning designation command has been received (step S522; Yes), and it is determined in step S532 that it is the seventh winning determination result notification command. (Step S532; Yes), the continuous production start setting process is executed (Step S536), and when it is determined in Step S706 in FIG. 32 that the continuous production is to be executed, the process is shown in FIG. Thus, in step S537 of FIG. 31, detection of a game ball that has entered one of the display parts not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H into the second start winning opening (start winning prize). The display setting for changing to the blue star display is performed in accordance with the establishment of the second start condition. In the big hit gaming state, even if it is determined to be a continuous production pattern that executes a continuous production using the operation buttons 32, a continuous production performed over a plurality of variable displays cannot be executed. The production is not executed, and the continuous production is performed only with the shape of the display part.

  The left side of the display portion of the start winning memory display area 5H displays the number of reserved memories corresponding to the first start prize, and the right side displays the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second start prize. It is different. In response to the game balls winning in the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening during the big hit gaming state, as shown in FIG. 47 (D), the hold display in the display portion of the start winning storage display area 5H Will increase.

  When the big hit gaming state is finished, as shown in FIG. 47 (E), the hold display corresponding to the second start winning prize is shifted to the left, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game is displayed. The variable display is started, and then, on the image display device 5, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination is derived and displayed as shown in FIG. 47 (F), for example. The variable display of the decorative design ends. It should be noted that the operation button 32 is used over a plurality of variable displays (for example, in FIGS. 47E and 47G) after the end of the big hit gaming state until the variable display subject to determination is executed. You may make it perform a continuous production.

  After that, when the second start condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 47 (G), the display part changed to the star display is returned to the non-display, and the hold display corresponding to the second start winning prize is shifted leftward. At the same time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game, and as shown in FIG. 47 (H), the variable symbol display state is changed to the reach state. As shown in I), a reach effect is executed in which the reach mode is super reach. After that, the image display device 5 derives and displays the final decorative symbol combination that is the final stop symbol constituting the jackpot combination, for example, as shown in FIG. To do.

  In addition, during the big hit game state, the continuous presentation is performed only by the shape of the display part, but by performing the presentation such as displaying a predetermined character image during the big hit game state, there is a possibility that the big hit will continue. Or you may make it announce the possibility of becoming super reach. For example, when it is determined that a continuous effect is to be executed during the jackpot gaming state, an effect of operating the operation button 32 may be executed over a plurality of rounds of the jackpot gaming state.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 42 to 46, when the continuous production is being executed, the game ball that has won the start by the second start port switch 22A is detected, and the second start port winning designation command is sent from the main board 11. When transmitted to the production control board 12, the production control board 12 determines that the production interruption flag is OFF in step S731 in FIG. 36 (step S731; No), and in step S732 Based on determining that the 1-continuous effect flag is on (step S732; Yes) and determining that the second start opening winning designation command is received in step S733 (step S733; Yes), the process proceeds to step S734. Then, it is determined whether or not the variable display result specified by the second change start command is “losing”. At this time, when it is determined in step S734 that the variable display result is “losing” (step S734; Yes), in step S736, the effect suspension flag is set to the on state, so that step S737 is performed. 39, it is determined that the first variation designation command has been received, and the continuous effect execution process in step S561 in FIG. 39 is skipped until the effect suspension flag is cleared and turned off in step S738. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S734 that the variable display result is a “hit” such as “big hit” or “small hit” (step S734; No), the continuous effect is ended in step S735. For this reason, the execution of continuous production is prohibited. As a result, it is possible to prevent the continuity in the continuous performance from being impaired, and it is possible to prevent the continuous performance from being out of order, so without increasing the processing burden when performing the continuous performance, It is possible to prevent the continuous performance from becoming unnatural.

  Next, an example of attaching the game board 2 to the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine with the front frame released. As shown in FIG. 48, the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a gaming frame 61 and a front frame 62 so as to be freely opened and closed. The front frame 62 is formed with a glass window 63 that allows a game area formed on the surface of the game board 2 to be viewed from the front of the front frame 62. On the back surface of the game board 2, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a drawer relay board 19 are provided. The drawer relay board 19 is provided with drawer connectors 32a and 32b. The drawer relay board 19 is connected to the main board 11 and the game board 2 and relays various control signals transmitted between the game frames 61. The game frame 61 is a frame for installing the game board 2, and the game frame 61 is provided with the power supply board 16, the payout control board 17, the frame side connectors 33a and 33b, and the frame relay board 26. It is done. The front frame 62 is also provided with a production device such as a game effect lamp 9 (not shown in FIG. 48). The frame side connector 33 a is connected to the power supply board 16. The frame side connector 33 b is connected to the frame relay board 26. A slot having the same size as the game board 2 is formed in the game frame 61, and the game board 2 can be installed in the game frame 61 by fitting the game board 2 in this groove. After the game board 2 is fitted into the groove of the game frame 61, the game board 2 is fixed to the game frame 61 with a stopper or the like. When the game board 2 is installed in the game frame 61, the drawer connector 32a is coupled to the frame side connector 33a, and the drawer connector 32b is coupled to the frame side connector 33b. Various substrates on the 61 side are connected. Each connector is provided at a position to be coupled when the game board 2 is installed in the game frame 61.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the method for attaching the game board. As shown in FIG. 48, the game board 2 is configured to be attached from the front surface of the game frame 61. In this case, the positional relationship between the drawer connector 32 (32a, 32b) and the frame-side connector 33 (33a, 33b) becomes difficult to visually recognize, making it difficult to connect them, and making it difficult to attach the game board 2 There is. The game frame 61 may be provided with attachment mechanisms 34 a and 34 b to facilitate the attachment of the game board 2. The attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b are provided to be openable and closable around the hinges 35a and 35b, respectively. The attachment mechanisms 34 a and 34 b have a U-shaped shape as shown in FIG. 49 and have a bottom having a width corresponding to the game board 2. By pushing the game board 2 into the game frame 61 in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 49B, the game board 2 is fixed by the attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b as shown in FIG. 49A. At this time, since the game board 2 is fixed at a fixed position, these are coupled without being aware of the positional relationship between the drawer connector 32 and the frame side connector 33.

  FIG. 50 (A) is a configuration diagram showing the connection relationship of the respective boards when the game board is attached. When the drawer connector 32 and the frame side connector 33 are coupled, as shown in FIG. 50A, the main board 11 on the game board 2 side and the effect control board 12 are connected to the game frame 61 side via the drawer relay board 12. The power supply board 16, the payout control board 17, and the frame relay board 26 are connected. As shown in FIG. 50B, power from the power supply board 16 is transmitted to the main board 11 via the drawer relay board 19. The prize ball signal from the main board 11 is transmitted to the payout control board 17 via the drawer relay board 19 and the power supply board 16. Based on the prize ball signal, the payout control board 17 drives the ball payout device 18 to pay out the prize ball. As described above, since the prize ball signal is transmitted to the payout control board 17 via the power supply board 16, it is not necessary to provide a connector for connecting from the game board 2 to the payout control board 17, so the number of connectors is reduced. be able to.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 50C, the power from the power supply board 16 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 via the drawer relay board 19. A control signal between the effect control board 12 and the frame relay board 26 is transmitted via the drawer relay board 19. The frame relay board 26 transmits control signals from the sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 to the speaker 8 and the game effect lamp 9. Further, the frame relay board 26 sends a detection signal from the operation detection switch 31 to the effect control board 12.

  As described above, in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to execute a continuous effect that can change the effect mode stepwise in response to a continuous operation (continuous hitting) on the operation button 32. Even after the continuous production is executed once, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation for the change of the production. Also, as shown in FIG. 24, if the random value MR3 is in the range of “230” to “251”, it is within the range of the common range of the super reach variation pattern for both normal use and short time use. If there is, the production corresponding to this can be executed. On the other hand, for variable patterns other than super reach, the judgment value is assigned differently depending on whether it is for normal or short-time use, so variable display time can be adjusted, and the variable display operating rate can be adjusted. The situation where it falls can be prevented as much as possible.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, in continuous production pattern RP2-1-continuous production pattern RP2-3, continuous production pattern RP4-1-continuous production pattern RP4-3, according to pressing operation with respect to the operation button 32, image display apparatus. An effect of reducing the number of people displayed in 5 is executed. More specifically, with respect to the initial number display of 100 people, in the continuous production of the continuous production pattern RP2-1 to the continuous production pattern RP2-3, the number of people is reduced by 5 according to the pressing operation on the operation button 32. Let In the continuous production of the continuous production pattern RP4-1 to the continuous production pattern RP4-3, the display of the number of persons is reduced by 10 in response to the pressing operation on the operation button 32. That is, the display of the number of people is easier to reduce in the continuous effect pattern RP4-1 to the continuous effect pattern RP4-3 than in the continuous effect pattern RP2-1 to the continuous effect pattern RP2-3. When the continuous production start condition establishment buffer value is “1” or “3”, the continuous production patterns RP2-1 to RP2-1 are compared to the case where the continuous production start condition establishment buffer value is “2” or “4”. Many determination values are assigned to the continuous performance pattern RP2-3. On the other hand, when the continuous production start condition establishment buffer value is “2” or “4”, the continuous production start condition establishment buffer value is “1” or “3” compared to the case where the continuous production start condition establishment buffer value is “1” or “3”. Many determined values are assigned to the patterns RP4-1 to RP4-3. Therefore, depending on whether or not the display of the number of people tends to decrease in response to the pressing operation of the operation button 32, the possibility of the variable display result being a “big hit” (the big hit reliability) is changed to improve the interest of the game. Can be made.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), a continuous effect that succeeds the content of the continuous effect in the previous variable display is executed, or as shown in FIG. 44 (D), the same continuous effect in each variable display. By executing, the range of production is expanded and the interest of the game is improved.

  In this embodiment, only the fourth winning determination result notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 during the big hit gaming state or during the execution of the short time control (high base state). The continuous production is not executed for the first start prize. As a result, while executing the continuous production as much as possible, the second display is performed during the execution of the continuous production started based on the determination that the variable display result of the special figure game using the first special figure is “big hit”. By using the fact that the special figure is preferentially digested, the player intentionally establishes the second start condition and executes the special figure game using the second special figure, so that a big hit stock-like effect is executed. Can be reliably prevented.

  Moreover, in addition to the continuous production | presentation by the shape of the shape of a display part, the continuous production | generation which uses the operation button 32 may be performed. Such a continuous effect is also called a specific effect. In this embodiment, in addition to the continuous effect based on the shape of the display part shape, when the specific effect is executed, there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” than when the specific effect is not executed ( (Big hit reliability) is set to be high. According to such a configuration, the player pays attention to the continuous performance, and can improve the interest of the game.

  The prize ball signal from the main board 11 is transmitted to the payout control board 17 via the drawer relay board 19 and the power supply board 16. Based on the prize ball signal, the payout control board 17 drives the ball payout device 18 to pay out the prize ball. As described above, since the prize ball signal is transmitted to the payout control board 17 via the power supply board 16, it is not necessary to provide a connector for connecting from the game board 2 to the payout control board 17, so the number of connectors is reduced. be able to.

  Further, the lost variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the lost variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D have different assignments of determination values to the variation pattern types CA1-3 and CA2-1. . Further, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C, no determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2 or the variation pattern type CA2-3, while the variation pattern type CA1-1 or the variation pattern is not assigned. A decision value is assigned to the type CA2-2. On the other hand, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, no determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-1 or the variation pattern type CA2-2, while the variation pattern type CA1-2. In addition, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA2-3. By setting the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, the variation pattern types CA1- other than the variation pattern types CA2-4 including the variation pattern with super reach are included. The allocation of determined values to 1 to variation pattern types CA1-3 and variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3 differs depending on the gaming state and the total number of reserved memories. This makes it possible to adjust the variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol by varying the determination rate of the variation pattern according to the total number of reserved memory that is the reserved memory number of the special figure game. The situation where the operating rate is reduced can be prevented as much as possible. On the other hand, in the winning specific pattern determination process in step S211, it is determined whether or not the random value MR3 is within the common range of the super reach variation pattern regardless of the total number of reserved memories. For example, the total number of reserved memories, which was “2” at the start of the continuous production, has increased to “4” at the time of the variable display of the last decorative design in the continuous production. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the reach mode does not become super reach.

  In addition, in the case where continuous production is being executed based on the reach aspect in the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first start winning prize being super reach, before the variable display of the decorative pattern with super reach, When the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second starting prize is executed, which is executed preferentially for the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first starting prize, the second variation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board. 12 is transmitted. Then, on the side of the effect control board 12, it is determined whether or not the variable display result specified by the second variation start command is “losing” in step S734 of FIG.

  At this time, if the variable display result is “losing” in step S734 (step S734; Yes), the execution interruption flag is set to the on state in step S736, so that execution of the continuous effect is temporarily prohibited. The Then, based on having received the 1st change start command in Step S737, execution of a continuous production is resumed by clearing a production interruption flag in Step S738, and being made into an OFF state.

  On the other hand, if the variable display result is “hit” such as “big hit” or “small hit” in step S734 (step S734; No), setting for ending the continuous effect is performed in step S735. As a result, execution of continuous production is prohibited. As a result, it is possible to prevent the continuity of the continuous performance from being impaired, and to prevent the continuous performance from becoming unfit, so without increasing the processing load when performing the continuous performance, It is possible to prevent the continuous performance from becoming unnatural.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, A various change and application are possible. For example, in the above-described embodiment, a continuous effect that reduces the number of people displayed on the image display device 5 in response to a continuous pressing operation on the operation button 32 is executed. Correspondingly, it is not limited to this as long as the effect mode is changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 51, continuous production patterns RP2-1 to continuous production pattern RP2-3, continuous production patterns RP3-1 to continuous production pattern RP3-3 are continuously executed to perform a continuous production by pressing the operation button 32. As an effect pattern, the operation button 32 and the operation dial 33 are used as a continuous effect pattern for executing a continuous effect of rotating the operation dial 33 (decreasing the number of people displayed for each rotation) from RP4-1 to RP4-3. Depending on which one of the operation units 30 is operated, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (big hit reliability) may be made different. Further, in this embodiment, the operation button 32 and the operation dial 33 are illustrated as the operation unit 30, but in addition to this, an operation unit that can be further operated is provided, and a continuous effect for continuously operating the operation unit is provided. May be executed. By doing so, an effect using a plurality of operation means can be executed, so the width of the effect is widened and the interest of the game is improved.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the continuous production which reduces a number display from 100 persons was performed according to operation with respect to the operation button 32, the production aspect is not limited to this. In addition to 100 people to be initially displayed, a continuous performance pattern is provided in which 200 or 1000 people are provided, and the reliability that the variable display result is “big hit” differs depending on the number of people displayed first. Also good. Further, instead of displaying the number of people, “Big hit reliability 1%” may be displayed first, and a continuous effect in which the display of reliability increases according to the operation on the operation button 32 may be executed. Furthermore, you may make it perform the continuous production which performs a number display and reliability display together. In addition, as a continuous effect, a level meter may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an effect may be executed in which the numerical value of the level meter increases or decreases in accordance with an operation on the operation button 32. Further, a character may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an effect may be executed such that the character is transformed or the number of characters is increased in accordance with an operation on the operation button 32.

  In the above embodiment, by changing the number of people to be reduced for each pressing operation on the operation button 32, the continuous presentation pattern (RP4-1 to 4-3) in which the number of people is easily reduced and the number of people in the number of times of being continuously reduced are not easily reduced. Production patterns (RP2-1 to 2-3) are provided, and the reliability that is a big hit in each case is different. For example, the number of people to be decreased for each pressing operation on the operation button 32 is the same, the operation effective period is different (for example, the operation effective period is 5 seconds and 10 seconds), and the operation effective period is specified. There may be provided a continuous performance pattern in which the number display is likely to decrease by increasing the number of persons to be reduced only in the period, and a continuous performance pattern in which the number display is difficult to decrease. In addition, the number of persons can be displayed by providing a continuous effect pattern that reduces the number display with a probability of 30% and a continuous effect pattern that decreases the number of persons display with a probability of 50% for each pressing operation on the operation button 32. You may provide the continuous production pattern which is easy to decrease, and the continuous production pattern which is hard to reduce the number display. Then, the selection ratio of each continuous performance pattern may be varied depending on whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. For example, when the variable display result is “big hit”, a long operation effective period may be easily selected, and a continuous performance pattern that easily reduces the number of people may be easily selected. In addition, depending on whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, continuous production patterns with different operation effective periods, continuous production patterns with different probabilities of reducing the number of people displayed for one press operation, and continuous reductions only for a specific period. You may make it each selection ratio of an effect pattern differ. Further, in a continuous performance pattern in which the number display is decreased with a predetermined probability, the number to be decreased with respect to one pressing operation may be determined by lottery. In this case, if the variable display result is “lost”, the number is not reduced from 10 people.

  In the above embodiment, whether or not to start the continuous production is determined on the side of the production control board 12 based on the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command from the main board 11. As explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this. On the main board 11 side, it is determined whether or not to start a continuous effect, and an effect control command for notifying the determination result is sent from the main board 11. It may be transmitted to the effect control board 12. Specifically, when it is determined in step S353 in FIG. 22 that it is not within the non-reach fluctuation pattern common range (step S353; No), the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern type is the super-reach fluctuation pattern common range. Depending on whether or not it is within the range, it is only necessary to determine whether or not to start the continuous production by executing the processing corresponding to steps S704 to S707 in FIG.

  In the above embodiment, when the start port buffer value is “1” in the winning specific pattern determining process of FIG. 22 and is controlled to the time-saving state, the probability variation state, or the big hit gaming state, the winning determination result Regardless of whether or not the fourth winning determination result notification command is transmitted in step S355 so that the continuous performance is not executed, the first start winning opening in the short-time state, the probability variation state, or the big hit gaming state The control for prohibiting the continuous performance based on the winning is not limited to this. For example, on the game control board 11 side, regardless of the gaming state, a winning determination result notification command of any of the first winning determination result notification command to the fourth winning determination result notification command is transmitted ( If the game state is specified on the side of the effect control board 12 and the game is controlled to the short-time state, the probability variation state, or the big hit game state (without performing the processing of steps S350A to S350C) You may make it not perform the continuous production | presentation based on the winning to a mouth. For example, a command that can specify the game state is transmitted from the game control board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the game state can be specified on the effect control board 12 side. When the gaming state is the short-time state, the probability variation state, or the big hit gaming state, even if the second winning determination result notification command or the third winning determination result notification command is notified, FIG. The continuous effect start setting process in steps S510 and S517 may be skipped.

  In addition, when the start opening buffer value is “1” in the winning specific pattern determining process of FIG. 22 and the time-short state, the probability variation state, or the big hit gaming state is controlled, the winning specific pattern determining process is terminated. In this way, the winning determination result notification command may not be transmitted. In this case, a command that can specify the game state is transmitted from the game control board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the game state can be specified on the effect control board 12 side. On the side of the effect control board 12, when the game state is a short-time state, a probability change state, or a big hit game state, the display update setting at the start winning prize is set based on the reception of the first start opening prize designation command. (Step S504 in FIG. 30) is executed, and when the gaming state is not the short-time state, the probability variation state, or the big hit gaming state, the command processing at the start winning prize in FIG. 30 may be executed. Note that the determination of the completion of the time-saving state may be performed by executing the same process as step S303 in FIG.

  In this embodiment, only the fourth winning determination result notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 during the big hit gaming state or during the execution of the short time control (high base state). Thus, the continuous production is not executed for the first start prize, but the prize determination result notification command other than the fourth prize determination result notification command is also transmitted so that the first start prize is received. On the other hand, it is possible not to execute the continuous performance.

  In the above embodiment, when the first continuous effect flag is on (step S732; Yes), if the second variation start command is received (step S733; Yes), the continuous effect is ended (step S735). The continuous effect was interrupted until the first change start command was received (step S736). That is, the continuous effect corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A is not executed during variable display corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a continuous effect corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A may be executed during variable display corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B.

  In the above embodiment, when the variable display result notified from the first start opening winning designation command or the second start opening winning designation command is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the variable display result is “ In the case of “small hit”, it has been described that continuous production is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or when the variable display result is “small hit”, the continuous effect is provided. It may not be executed. Specifically, when it is determined in step S352 of FIG. 22 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (step S352; No), the special figure display result extracted in step S209 of FIG. 21 is determined. It is determined whether or not the random value MR1 matches the determined value for “small hit”, and if not, the determined random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type extracted in step S209 becomes “surprise”. What is necessary is just to determine whether it corresponds with a value. Then, if the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type does not match the determined value for “surprising”, the same processing as in steps S364 to S366 in FIG. 23 is executed to determine the special figure display result. When the random number value MR1 of the match matches the determined value that becomes “small hit”, or when the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type matches the determined value that becomes “surprise”, the steps of FIG. What is necessary is just to make it perform the process similar to S361-S363.

  In the setting example of the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 10A, when the jackpot type is “non-probable variation”, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is “100” to “251”. If the random hit value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of “50” to “251” when the jackpot type is “probable variation”, the variation is accompanied by at least super reach. The variation pattern type CA3-3 including the pattern is determined. Therefore, in the process of step S357 of FIG. 22, as shown in FIG. 52A, if the random value MR3 is within the range of “230” to “251”, is the variable display result “lost”? Regardless of whether the big hit type is “big hit” other than “probability”, it may be determined that it is within the common range of the super reach variation pattern. Alternatively, the common reach range of the super reach variation pattern may be different between the case where it is determined that the big hit type is other than “surprise” and the case where the special figure display result is determined to be “lost”. . For example, when it is determined that the special figure display result is “losing”, if the random value MR3 is within the range of “230” to “251”, it is determined that it is within the common range of the super reach variation pattern. If it is determined that the jackpot type is other than “surprise”, as shown in FIG. 52B, if the random value MR3 is within the range of “100” to “251”, the super reach variation pattern You may determine with it being in the range of a common range.

  In the above embodiment, when it is determined in step S352 shown in FIG. 22 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (step S352; No), the special figure display results are “big hit” and “small hit”. Regardless of which, if the starting port buffer value is “1”, the third winning determination result notification command is sent, and if the starting buffer value is “7”, the seventh winning determination result notification command is sent Was described as being sent. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there are different winning determination result notification commands depending on whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or the special figure display result is “small hit”. It may be transmitted. In this case, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a winning determination result notification command indicating that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the special figure display result is “small hit”. The specific effect may be executed at a higher rate than when receiving the winning determination result notification command indicating that

  In the above embodiment, regardless of the total number of reserved memories, for example, by determining whether or not the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is “230” or more by the program, the range of the super reach variation pattern common range It has been described as determining whether or not it is within. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, either the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C or the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D corresponding to the total number of reserved memories. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is compared with the determination values assigned to the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D. You may make it determine with it being in the range of a super reach fluctuation pattern common range in the case of the predetermined common determination value.

  In the embodiment described above, one of the display parts provided in the start winning memory display area 5H during the continuous production is changed to a circular display (for example, the display part whose display color has changed). The shape of the rightmost display part) is described as being deformed and displayed in a star shape. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during execution of the continuous production, one shape is transformed into a moon shape, a solar shape, and a galaxy shape, although the shape is changed to a circular display. There may be. In addition, all of the objects that have changed to a circular display may be deformed and displayed in any one of a star shape, a moon shape, a solar shape, and a galaxy shape. Further, not only the shape of the display part but also the display color thereof may be changed to, for example, “green”, “blue”, “yellow”, “red”. In this case, according to the display color of the display part, the possibility that the variable display of the decorative design with super reach will be executed and the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” may be different.

  As another example of continuous production, the shape of the display part is, for example, “star shape”, “moon shape”, depending on the high possibility of variable display of decorative symbols whose variable display result is “big hit” , “Solar shape”, “Galaxy shape”, etc. In addition, the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 so that the shape of the display part and the effect image in the continuous effect are different for each variable display of the decorative pattern that is executed a plurality of times. You may make it go. For example, among the variable display of the decorative design that is performed multiple times, the shape of one of the circular display parts (for example, the rightmost display part of the circular display part) is changed at the start of the continuous effect. Display deformed in a star shape. After that, based on the establishment of the start condition for starting the variable display game, the display part deformed and displayed in a star shape is returned to non-display, and the circular display part that is different from the display part that has been returned to non-display The shape of one of the display parts (for example, the display part adjacent to the left of the display part that has returned to non-display) is deformed and displayed in a moon shape. Then, in the first variable display of decorative designs, an effect operation is performed to display an effect image of “moon” corresponding to the shape of the deformed display portion (in this example, a moon shape). In the second variable display of decorative symbols, the display part deformed and displayed in a moon shape is returned to non-display, and one of the circular display parts different from the display part returned to non-display (for example, non-display) The shape of the display part on the left of the returned display part) is deformed and displayed in a sun shape. Then, in the second variable display of decorative symbols, an effect operation is performed to display an effect image of “sun” corresponding to the shape of the deformed display portion (in this example, the sun shape). In the variable display of the decorative pattern for the third time, the display part deformed and displayed in the sun shape is returned to non-display, and one of the circular display parts different from the display part returned to non-display (for example, non-display) is displayed. The display part on the left side of the returned display part) is deformed and displayed in a galaxy shape. Then, in the third variable display of decorative symbols, an effect operation is performed to display an effect image of “Galaxy” corresponding to the shape of the deformed display part (in this example, a galaxy shape). In the fourth variable display of decorative symbols, the display operation deformed and displayed in a galaxy shape is returned to non-display, and then the effect operation that is a continuous effect is ended. In this way, the shape of the display part and the effect image in the continuous performance are progressively changed in order from the low possibility that the variable display of the decorative pattern whose variable display result is “big hit” is executed. Thus, it is possible to make the player think that the possibility that the variable display of the decorative symbol whose variable display result is “big hit” is executed is increased step by step. Further, by changing the effect image in the continuous effect in response to the change in the shape of the display portion provided in the start winning memory display area 5H, the player need only pay attention to the continuous effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In the continuous effect, in the variable display of the decorative pattern, an effect operation is performed in which an effect image indicating “star” is displayed corresponding to the shape of the display part that is deformed (in this example, a star shape). Also good. At this time, the shape of the display portion is changed according to the high possibility that the variable display of the decorative pattern whose variable display result is “big hit” is executed, for example, “star shape”, “moon shape”, “sun shape” ”,“ Galaxy ”, etc. In addition, for example, “star”, “moon”, for example, depending on the possibility that the variable display of the decorative symbol whose variable display result will be “big hit” and the shape of the display part are performed on the effect image in the continuous effect. , “Sun”, “Galaxy” effect images, etc. When the effect image of “star” is displayed when the shape of the display part is “star shape”, or when the effect image of “moon” is displayed when the shape of the display part is “moon shape” When the display image of the “sun” is displayed when the shape of the display part is “sun shape”, or when the effect image of “galactic” is displayed when the shape of the display part is “galactic shape” For example, when an effect image (first effect mode) corresponding to the shape of the display part is displayed, the possibility that the variable display of the decorative symbol whose variable display result is “big hit” is reduced is reduced. When the shape of the display part is set to “star”, the display part shape is displayed, for example, when an effect image other than “star” is displayed, such as “moon”, “sun”, or “galactic” effect image. When an effect image (second effect mode) that does not correspond to is displayed, the variable display result is It may be set so that a possibility that the variable display is performed of decorative design as the big hit "is high. By doing in this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” varies depending on whether or not the shape of the display portion corresponds to the effect image in the continuous performance. Therefore, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, only the effect image in the continuous effect may be changed without changing the shape of the display part. For example, among the variable display of the decorative design that is performed multiple times, the shape of one of the circular display parts (for example, the rightmost display part of the circular display part) is changed at the start of the continuous effect. Display deformed in a star shape. After that, based on the establishment of the start condition for starting the variable display game, the display part deformed and displayed in a star shape is returned to non-display, and the circular display part that is different from the display part that has been returned to non-display The shape of one of the display parts (for example, the display part on the left side of the display part returned to non-display) is deformed and displayed in a star shape. On the other hand, in the first variable display of decorative symbols, an effect operation is performed to display an effect image of “moon” that does not correspond to the shape of the display part that has been deformed (in this example, a star shape). In this way, only the effect image in the continuous effect is changed without changing the shape of the display part, and the effect image that initially corresponds to the shape of the display part does not correspond to the shape of the display part. Thus, it is possible to make the player think as if the possibility that the variable display of the decorative symbol whose variable display result is “big hit” has been increased has been increased. On the contrary, only the shape of the display part may be changed without changing the effect image in the continuous effect.

  In the above embodiment, it has been described that the effect image in the continuous effect is executed from the start of the variable display of the decorative design, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design It may be executed, or may be executed at the end of the variable display of decorative symbols.

  In the setting example of the continuous production start determination table 160 shown in FIG. 14, the random value MR1 extracted at the time of starting winning matches the determined value at which the variable display result is “hit” such as “big hit” or “small hit”. Regardless of whether or not the random value MR3 is within the common reach range of the super reach variation pattern, the continuous effect pattern RP1-1 to the continuous effect pattern RP1-3 and the continuous effect pattern RP4-1 to continuous There is a possibility that the display part provided in the start winning memory display area 5H, such as the effect pattern RP4-3, is determined to be a continuous effect pattern that changes to green display. For this reason, even when the variable display result coincides with a determined value that is “hit” such as “big hit” or “small hit”, or when the random value MR3 is within the common range of the super reach variation pattern, The description has been made on the assumption that the display portion provided in the start winning memory display area 5H may be changed to green display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the case where the variable display result matches the determined value that is “winning” such as “big hit” or “small hit”, or the random value MR3 is a super reach variation pattern. If it is within the common range, the display part provided in the start winning storage display area 5H may not be changed to green display.

  In the above embodiment, when the first start winning designation command is the fourth winning determination result notification command, or when the second starting winning designation command is the eighth winning determination result notification command, the first variation It has been described that the decorative pattern with normal reach is not variably displayed in the continuous production by setting both the count count value and the second variation count value to “0”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first start winning designation command is the fourth winning determination result notification command, the first variation count value is incremented by one and updated. When the second start winning designation command is the eighth winning determination result notification command, the second variation count value may be updated by one. In this way, variable display of decorative designs with normal reach can be performed during the continuous performance, so that the variable display result of “losing” that the variable display of decorative designs with normal reach has ended during the continuous performance is derived. Even when displayed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the continuous production will continue, and the game entertainment can be further improved.

  In the above embodiment, the second winning determination result notification command and the sixth winning determination result notification command for notifying that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the common range of the super reach variation pattern. The third prize is notified when the random number MR1 for determining the special display result is received or the random display value MR1 matches the determined value for determining the variable display result as “big hit” or “small hit”. It has been described that the determination as to whether or not to start the continuous performance is performed when the time determination result notification command or the seventh winning determination result notification command is received. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first winning determination result notification command for notifying that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the non-reach variation pattern common range, Even when the fifth winning determination result notification command is received, it may be determined whether or not to start the continuous effect. In this way, it is possible to execute a variable display continuous display effect (so-called “gase continuous effect”) in which the variable display state does not reach the reach state.

  In the above embodiment, by determining the continuous effect pattern in step S717 of FIG. 33, the shape of the display portion of the start winning memory display area 5H and the continuous display in the variable display of all the decorative symbols for which the continuous effect is executed are displayed. It demonstrated as the presence or absence of the specific production in production being determined collectively. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the shape of the display portion of the start winning memory display area 5H and the presence / absence of the specific effect in the continuous effect may be determined separately. At this time, first, the shape of the display part in the start winning storage display area 5H is determined as any one of a plurality of shapes, and then the shape of the display part determined in advance and the time of winning in step S211 shown in FIG. The continuous effect mode in the continuous effect may be determined as one of a plurality of types according to the determination result in the specific pattern determination process. Specifically, if it is determined in the winning specific pattern determination process in step S211 that the variable display result is “lost”, it is determined that the variable display result is “hit” such as “big hit” or “small hit”. When the variable display result is determined to be “hit” such as “big hit” or “small hit” while the ratio of not performing the specific effect is increased compared to the case where the specific effect is executed, the variable display result is “ What is necessary is just to raise the ratio which performs a specific production compared with the case where it determines with becoming "losing".

  Further, the shape of the display part in the start winning memory display area 5H may be determined in advance. At this time, according to the determination result in the winning specific pattern determination process in step S211 shown in FIG. The specific effect in the continuous effect may be determined as one of a plurality of types. That is, when it is determined in the winning specific pattern determination process in step S211 that the variable display result is “lost”, the variable display result is determined to be “hit” such as “big hit” or “small win”. When the variable display result is determined to be “hit” such as “big hit” or “small hit” while increasing the ratio that the specific effect is not executed, the variable display result is “lost”. Compared to the case where it is determined that the specific effect is to be performed, the rate at which the specific effect is executed may be increased.

  Further, the shape of the display part of the start winning memory display area 5H and the specific effect in the continuous effect are determined each time the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed once in the setting process of the continuous effect in FIG. 36, for example. May be. Alternatively, only the shape of the display portion of the start winning memory display area 5H in the variable display of all the decorative symbols for which the continuous effect is executed is determined at the same time when the continuous effect starts, and the specific effect in the continuous effect is, for example, FIG. It may be determined each time the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed once in the continuous production setting process.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B has been described. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with one special symbol display device is also described. The invention can be applied.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 performs the continuous effect start setting process in step S511, the setting process during continuous effect in step S512, and the final stop symbol determination process in step S513 shown in FIG. The control contents of various effects are determined by executing the variable display effect setting process in step S514, the notice effect setting process in step S515, and the continuous effect execution process in step S531 shown in FIG. As explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the control contents of various rendering operations are shared and determined by a plurality of CPUs mounted on a plurality of control boards provided to control the rendering operations. It may be.

  As an example, a display control board is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5. The display control board only needs to be equipped with a display control CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a random number circuit, and an I / O. In this case, since the display control CPU mounted on the display control board executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, it is mounted on the effect control board 12 in the above embodiment. The display control unit 123 may be mounted on the display control board. In the display control board, for example, the display control CPU executes a program read from the ROM, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by displaying the effect image in the image display device 5. At this time, the display control CPU reads fixed data from the ROM, the display control CPU writes various variation data to the RAM and temporarily stores them, and the display control CPU stores the variation data in the RAM. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, display operation CPU for receiving input of various signals from outside of display control board via I / O, display control CPU for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the display control board is also performed.

  In this case, the display control CPU performs steps S551 to S555 shown in FIG. 35 based on, for example, a display control command from the effect control board 12 or an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the effect control board 12. Any one of the processes may be executed, or the continuous effect execution process in step S561 shown in FIG. 39 may be executed. The display control CPU only needs to execute any part of the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the above embodiment. Further, the sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 may be connected to the effect control board 12 by wiring for transmitting a control command from the effect control board 12. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, a process for comprehensively controlling the effect operation may be executed by the effect control CPU 120.

  Alternatively, the functions of the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are provided in the voice control circuit and the lamp control circuit mounted on the effect control board 12, and independent control to become the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14. The substrate may not be provided. In this case, a display control board as described above is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5, and the effect control pattern determined by the effect control CPU 120 in step S555 of FIG. The display control command may be transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the display control board. In the configuration shown in FIG. 3, any one of the processes executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the above embodiment by the microcomputer mounted on the sound control board 13 and the microcomputer mounted on the lamp control board 14 is selected. May be executed. Thus, when a plurality of control boards are provided to control the rendering operation, the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the control of the audio output operation in the speakers 8L and 8R. The process for determining the control content of various effect operations, such as the process for determining the content and the process for determining the control content of the lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 is performed on any control board. The combination to be executed may be any combination.

  In the above embodiment, the small hit game state is controlled based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, and the game state is not changed after the small hit game state ends. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state based on the fact that the big hit type becomes “surprise”, and after the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the positive change state. Explained as being. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of, or in addition to, the case where the big hit type is “accurate” or the variable display result is “small hit”, A case of “suddenly normal” may be provided. As an example, “suddenly short time” and “suddenly normal” are included in the jackpot type when the variable display result is “big jackpot”. In this case, the jackpot type determination table 131 sets the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type according to the variation special figure designation buffer value as a “sudden shortening” or “sudden normal” jackpot. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that the table data allocated to a classification may be included. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly short”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as the big hit type is “surprising”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the big hit type is “Accuracy”, it is controlled to the short time state. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “suddenly normal”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state in the same manner as the big hit type is “surprising”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the big hit type is “Accuracy”, it is controlled to the normal state. Thereby, a player's expectation with respect to the gaming state controlled after the end of the two round big hit state can be enhanced, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  When such “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” are provided, a variation pattern type or variation pattern different from those other than “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” may be determined. As a result, although the big hit type is “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal”, the same operation as the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state is performed despite being controlled to the 2 round big hit state. It can prevent the player from feeling distrust. In addition, when the big hit type is "Suddenly short" or "Suddenly normal", when the variable display result is "Small hit", or when the big hit type is "Sudden", the common variation pattern type It may be possible to make a decision. As a result, when determining the fluctuation pattern, the big hit type is “Suddenly short” or “Sudden normal”, or the variable display result is “Small hit” or the big hit type is “Abrupt”. Regardless of whether this is the case, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in advance a computer It is possible to adopt a form distributed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start-up switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... operation unit 31 ... operation detection switch 100 ... game control microcomputers 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (5)

After the game medium passes through the start area provided in the game area, based on the establishment of a start condition that allows the start of variable display, variable display of multiple types of identification information that can identify each is performed, and the display result is derived. A gaming machine comprising variable display means for displaying and controlling a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the identification information,
When a game medium passes through the starting area, a specific game state determination value for determining whether or not to control to the specific game state, and a variable display determination for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information Extraction means for extracting the numerical values for use;
For the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium has passed through the starting area, the specific gaming state determination numerical value and the variable display determination numerical value extracted by the extraction means are set to a predetermined upper limit. A holding storage means capable of storing as holding storage within a range of numbers;
Predetermining means for deciding whether or not to control to the specific gaming state using the numerical value for determining the specific gaming state corresponding to the variable display for which the start condition is satisfied, before derivation display of the display result;
Based on the determination result of the prior determination means, the variable display determination numerical value corresponding to the variable display for which the start condition is satisfied, and a determination table in which determination values are assigned to a plurality of types of variable display patterns. Using variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information;
Based on the variable display determination numerical value extracted by the extraction means when the game medium passes through the start area before the start condition is satisfied, and the determined value, the variable display pattern of the identification information Starting determination means for determining whether or not a specific variable display pattern of a plurality of types of variable display patterns;
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
In the variable display prior to the execution of the variable display targeted for the determination based on the determination by the start determination means, the effect mode can be changed stepwise based on the continuous operation of the operation means. Production execution means for executing a specific production;
With
In the determination table, a common determination value is assigned to the specific variable display pattern regardless of the number of reserved memories in the reserved storage unit, while a variable display pattern other than the specific variable display pattern is assigned. On the other hand, a different decision value is assigned according to the number of reserved memories. The start determination means controls the specific game state based on the specific game state determination value extracted by the extraction means when a game medium passes through the start area before the start condition is satisfied. Further determine whether or not
The production execution means varies a ratio of changing the production mode in stages in the specific production according to a determination result of whether or not the specific determination state is controlled by the start determination unit. The gaming machine according to claim 1. The production execution means
While executing the specific effect, the specific effect is executed in each variable display until the variable display that is the target of the determination is executed,
The said specific effect which succeeded the content of the said specific effect in the last variable display is performed when performing the said specific effect in the variable display after starting execution of the said specific effect. 2. The gaming machine according to 2. The production execution means
While executing the specific effect, the specific effect is executed in each variable display until the variable display that is the target of the determination is executed,
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the same specific effect is executed in each variable display. The start determination means controls the specific game state based on the specific game state determination value extracted by the extraction means when a game medium passes through the start area before the start condition is satisfied. Further determine whether or not
The operating means includes first operating means and second operating means different from the first operating means,
The said effect execution means changes the said operation means operated in the said specific effect according to the determination result of whether it is controlled to the said specific game state by the said start determination means. 5. The gaming machine according to any one of 4.

Images